JP7428976B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as slot machines.

An example of a gaming machine that rotates a plurality of reels and then stops them is a slot machine. In a slot machine, a plurality of symbols are provided on the outer periphery of each reel, and a portion of the symbols provided to each reel are visible through a display window. When the player inserts a medal, an active line is set, and then, when the player operates the start lever, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") role, small role, etc. At the same time as a lottery of winning combinations such as re-gaming is carried out, each reel starts rotating, and by operating a stop switch after each reel starts rotating, each reel sequentially stops and one game ends. When all the reels stop rotating and the combination of symbols that correspond to winning combinations on the active line stops, a prize is won, and the player is given the privilege of receiving medals, shifting the gaming state, etc. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

In recent years, in addition to the BB state, which is entered when a BB win is achieved, as a gaming state advantageous to the player, there is also an assist system that notifies the player of the order in which to operate the stop switch to achieve a predetermined win when a predetermined winning combination is won. Some devices are equipped with a time (hereinafter referred to as "AT") state.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2002-355364

In gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a need to further improve gaming interest.

The above-mentioned problem is not limited to slot machines such as those exemplified above, but also applies to other gaming machines that cycle through a plurality of types of symbols and end the cycle display based on the subsequent operation of a stop operation means. That's a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment.

The invention according to claim 1 provides a plurality of cyclical display means for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols, a start operation means operated to start the cyclical display of the symbols, a lottery means for drawing a winning combination; Based on the fact that a plurality of stop operation means are operated to individually stop the circular display of symbols, and that the winning symbols corresponding to the winning combinations won in the lottery of the aforementioned combinations form a predetermined combination at the valid position and stop. In the gaming machine, the gaming machine is equipped with a privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege to a player when a winning is established; a normal state in which the instruction function does not operate, and the advantageous state includes a first game mode and a second game mode in which the instruction function operates more frequently than in the first game mode. , a first terminating means for terminating the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state when a first terminating condition is satisfied; and terminating the advantageous state when a second terminating condition different from the first terminating condition is satisfied. and a control means for controlling to display an end screen to notify that the advantageous state has ended, and the control means is configured to perform control such that the first end condition is satisfied. When the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is met, and the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends. In this case, the configuration is such that control is performed to display the end screen in a game round in which the second end condition is satisfied, and the second end condition can be satisfied when the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied. , when the first termination condition is met and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed in the first game of the normal state .

It becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the front door is open. Rear view of the front door. Front view of the housing. A diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. An explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefits provided. Block diagram of a slot machine. Flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. Flowchart showing normal processing. Flowchart showing lottery processing. A diagram showing an example of a lottery table in a three-card game. A diagram showing an example of a lottery table in a two-card game. Flowchart showing reel control processing. Flowchart showing pseudo game determination processing. Flowchart showing rotation start processing. 5 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 5 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 10 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 5 is a flowchart showing stop control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. Flowchart showing migration preparation processing. An explanatory diagram for explaining the transition of game sections. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in a normal section. A flowchart showing game section processing in a normal section. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in chance mode. Flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. 5 is a flowchart showing termination determination processing. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in notification mode. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo game. A diagram showing a sliding table used in a pseudo game. A diagram showing a sliding table used in a pseudo game. A diagram showing an example of a rotation mode and a display mode in a pseudo game. Flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 7 is a flowchart showing reel control processing in the second embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 5 is a flowchart showing stop control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. The flowchart which shows the production|presentation determination process in a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the production execution process in a display control device. 5 is a flowchart showing additional notification processing in the display control device. (a) A diagram showing the configuration of a pseudo game flag storage area in the third embodiment, (b) A diagram showing the configuration of a header. 5 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 1; 10 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 2; 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 3 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing 3; FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a fourth embodiment with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a block diagram regarding a display control device. Flowchart showing reel control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing instruction monitor display processing. 5 is a flowchart showing stop control processing. 5 is a flowchart showing a stop position determination process. 5 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing. 10 is a flowchart showing start waiting processing. Flowchart showing menu processing. Flowchart showing standby processing. 5 is a flowchart showing start command waiting processing. Flowchart showing production decision processing. Flowchart showing press effect processing. Flowchart showing result display processing. Flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode in the fifth embodiment. The flowchart which shows the section lottery process in notification mode. Flowchart showing game section processing in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing section command processing in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing start command processing in notification mode. 5 is a flowchart showing section command processing in a normal section and a chance mode. 5 is a flowchart showing start command processing in a normal section. A flowchart showing lottery result command processing in a normal section. A flowchart showing all reel stop completion command processing in a normal section. 5 is a flowchart showing start command processing in chance mode. The figure which shows an example of the display mode displayed on an auxiliary display part.

(First embodiment)

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 480-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=480 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 19 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

Symbols include "Cherry" symbol (for example, 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), "Bell" symbol (for example, 17th on left reel 32L), " "Red 7" symbol (e.g. 16th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g. 15th on left reel 32L), "Star" symbol (e.g. 14th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol ( For example, there are 8 types of symbols: 11th on the left reel 32L) and "White 7" symbol (for example, 6th on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, a total of five combination lines are set, three horizontally parallel lines and two diagonally crosswise lines, connecting each position where these nine symbols are visible. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the middle symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are used as horizontal combination lines. A connected middle line L2 and a lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are set. In addition, as a diagonal combination line, there is a line L4 that connects the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. Symbols and a line L5 rising to the right connecting the upper row symbols of the right reel 32R are set. If the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated combination line, that is, the active line, the prize is recognized as winning, and the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals as gaming media is given, or the gaming state is changed. Benefits are now being granted.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 7(b), only the middle line L2 is set as an active line. The four combination lines of the upper line L1, the lower line L3, the lower right line L4, and the upper right line L5 are not set as valid lines.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that are awarded when the winning combination occurs.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include BB1 winning and BB2 winning.

When the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line, a BB1 prize is awarded. When the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M and the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, a BB2 prize is awarded. When these BB wins are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

A replay win is an example of a win that provides a replay benefit that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals.

When the "replay" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, a replay win occurs.

Minor prizes for which medals are paid out include watermelon prizes, cherry prizes, bell prizes, and supplementary prizes.

When the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, three medals are paid out as a watermelon prize. When the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the active line, three medals are paid out as a cherry prize.

When the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on any combination line, nine medals are paid out as a bell win. More specifically, in addition to the case where the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the middle line L2, the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. When a combination of different symbols stops on the middle line L2, nine medals are paid out as a bell win. Examples of combinations of symbols that visually result in a bell prize include the combination of the "red 7" symbol, the "star" symbol, and the "star" symbol, the combination of the "BAR" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol. be. Further, although the details of the symbol combinations that result in winnings are omitted, when a supplementary winning combination is established, one medal is paid out.

Note that hereinafter, the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning symbol will also be referred to as a winning symbol combination. For example, the combination of BB2 symbols is a combination of symbols that results in a BB2 prize, that is, a combination of "red 7" symbols, "red 7" symbols, and "white 7" symbols. In addition, the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to each winning symbol are also referred to as winning symbols. For example, the BB2 symbol is a "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M, and a "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, on the left side of the first credit input switch 56, a second credit input switch 57 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting one virtual medal. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61, and a payout section that displays the number of medals paid out at the time of winning. A sheet number display section 62 is provided respectively. Furthermore, a section indicator 66 indicating a game section is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 62. Although these display sections 60 to 62 and the section display 66 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with a liquid crystal display or the like.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for providing various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called an auxiliary display section 65. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary display section 65.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 9.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a credit insertion detection sensor 56a to 58a that individually detects the operation of each credit input switch 56 to 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, and a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset switch 72. Various sensors such as a sensor 72a and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are sent to the input/output port 104. It is designed to be output to the CPU 102 via the CPU 102.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card The input/output port 104 is connected to an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, a section display 66, a display control device 81, a hall management device (not shown), etc. connected via.

The display control device 81 is a control device for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65, and includes a board in which a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc. for driving these are integrated. After receiving the signal from the main controller 101, the display controller 81 independently drives and controls the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-platform that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages games. Note that the various display sections 60 to 62 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 36 are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the game status, the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status, the section information storage area 106d for storing the game period, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 10), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 36.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage process, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been restored, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the stepping motor that is the respective reel drive motor is driven, and in order to stop the rotating reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the corresponding stepping motor is Performs stepping motor control processing such as applying a brake to the motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 9) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S111, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display sections 60 to 62 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S112, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S113, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 11.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not a re-game winning was achieved in the previous game. If the re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if a re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If a replay win has not been established, a sensor abnormality check process is performed to check whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, and if there is an abnormality. If an error has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality event processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do. After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bets for medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed. If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined in step S206 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S207, a valid line setting process is performed to set the middle line L1 as a valid line, and in step S208, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S209, the rotation initialization process in step S210, the 4.1 second elapsed waiting process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the game section process in step S214, and the step S215 The BB status processing is executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S209 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 12.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance. , it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed based on. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 13 is a lottery table selected in a 3-card game with "setting 3", and FIG. 14 is a lottery table selected in a 2-card game with "setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process advances to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=5, in step S306, a middle right/left bell winning flag indicating that the bell, supplementary role 2, and supplementary role 4 have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. do.

By the way, if the set winning flag is neither the BB1 winning flag indicating that BB1 was won nor the BB2 winning flag indicating that BB2 was won, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is set to the corresponding winning flag. It is reset after the end of the game (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the BB1 winning flag and the BB2 winning flag may be valid over multiple games. In addition, in step S306 when the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if BB1 or BB2 is won, the corresponding winning flag is set. Don't set flags. Therefore, for example, if you win BB2 in a 2-coin game and play a 3-coin game with the BB2 winning flag carried over, you will not win BB1.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV.

By the way, if you use the lottery table shown in Figure 13 to determine the validity of the winning combination in a 3-card game, the probability of winning in the replay is approximately 1 in 7.3. The probability of winning left and right bells, middle right left bell, right middle left bell, and right left middle bell is about 1 in 9.0, the probability of winning watermelon and cherry is about 1 in 50, and the probability of winning BB1 is about 1 in 9.0. The probability of this happening is approximately 1/12. In the 3-card game, the event of winning the 1-card winning combination and the event of winning BB2 do not occur.

If you use the lottery table shown in Figure 14 to determine the correctness of the winning combination in a two-card game, the probability of winning in the replay is approximately 1/7.3, which is 1 in 7.3, left middle right bell, left middle right bell, middle left right bell. , The probability of winning the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell is about 1/16,000 each, the probability of winning the watermelon and cherry is about 1/50 each, and the probability of winning the 1-card hand. The probability of winning BB2 is approximately 1/4.0. In the two-coin game, no event occurs that results in BB1 being won.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S309, and a section lottery process related to the transition of the game section is performed. In step S310, a lottery result command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the lottery result command, the display control device 81 grasps various results performed in the main lottery process, specifically, the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not, and the lottery result in the section lottery process. When the lottery result command is transmitted, the lottery process ends.

When the lottery process is completed, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11, a rotation initialization process is performed in step S210. The RAM 106 is provided with a motor control storage area that stores information used for drive control of the stepping motor, and in the rotation initialization process, processing is performed to initialize the motor control storage area. In step S211, a process of waiting for 4.1 seconds to elapse is performed. 4. In the 1 second elapsed wait process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (approximately 4.1 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the reels started rotating in the previous game, and If not, wait until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and the 4.1 second elapse waiting process is ended. Because the 4.1 second waiting process is performed, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start rotating immediately.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 15. In this slot machine 10, in addition to a game (hereinafter also referred to as "main game") in which benefits such as medal payouts are given when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination stops in one game round, there are also pseudo-games. Games may be played. In the following, in order to make it easier to understand, the reel control process will be explained first when no pseudo game is played, that is, when only the main game is played.

In the reel control process, in step S401, a pseudo game determination process is performed to determine whether or not to perform a pseudo game. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-gaming flag indicating that a pseudo-gaming has been performed is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not being played, the process advances to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started in accordance with the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the rotation start setting table address for the middle reel 32M is obtained. If the value of the repetition counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. That is, in the process in step S607, only the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition counter is acquired, and the stepping motor is not driven. Drive control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S610, and it is determined whether the pseudo-game post-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-gaming flag is not set, the process ends immediately.

As described above, in the rotation start process, acceleration is started in the order of left reel 32L → middle reel 32M → right reel 32R.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. If the stop information has not been set, the process advances to step S404, and a stop information setting process for setting the stop information is performed. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created according to the result of determining the validity of the winning combination, and the creation result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In addition, in step S404, stop information for reel stop control in the main game (hereinafter simply referred to as "stop information") is only set, and even if a pseudo game is performed, the reel stop in the pseudo game is Control stop information (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo game stop information") is not set. In step S405, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo game rotation start command is set in step S701. Here, the pseudo game rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started rotating in the pseudo game. In step S702, it is determined whether a pseudo game flag indicating that a pseudo game is to be played is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo game is not played, the pseudo game rotation start command is cleared in step S703, and the rotation start command is set in step S704. Here, the rotation start command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started rotating in this game. In step S705, the set rotation start command or pseudo game rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if the command transmission process 1 ends in step S406, the process advances to step S407, and it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process proceeds to step S408, and an instruction monitor display process is performed. . In the following step S409, command transmission processing 2 is performed.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process advances to step S902, and a stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 understands that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed in this game. Further, in step S902, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, the player etc. are informed that it is now possible to issue a stop command in this game. Thereafter, the command transmission process 2 is ended.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process advances to step S410 and a stop control process is performed.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process advances to step S1008, and it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S1001. If a stop command is issued, the process advances to step 1009, and a stop position determination process is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is acquired based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process advances to step S1106, and a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to generate the stop command and which reel is to be stopped. Further, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby notifying the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the stop command in this game. In the following step S1107, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S1107, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S1108, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, and if the pseudo game flag is not set, the stop position determination process is ended after performing the stop information change process in step S1110.

Here, the stop information changing process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information changing process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reels. This slot machine 10 issues a stop command when the left middle right bell, left right middle bell, middle left right bell, middle right left bell, right middle left bell, or right left middle bell is won (see Fig. 13). A stop information change process is performed to change the winning mode that is established depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have been generated.

For example, if the left middle right bell is won, the bell can be stopped in any other order such that if the left stop switch 42 -> middle stop switch 43 -> right stop switch 44 is operated in the order of operation, the bell will be won. The stop information is changed so that if the switches 42 to 44 are operated, a supplementary combination 1 win or a supplementary combination 4 win is established. The same applies to the left and right middle bells, middle left and right bells, middle right and left bells, right middle left bells, and right and left middle bells, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation that corresponds to the name of the winning combination, the bell will be won. The stop information is changed so that if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, a supplementary winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is achieved. In addition, hereinafter, the left middle right bell, the left and right middle bell, the middle left and right bells, the middle right left bell, the right middle left bell, and the right left middle bell are also collectively referred to as "push order combination" or "push order bell."

Incidentally, in this slot machine 10, if a replay win is achieved through the stop information setting process and the stop information changing process, the replay win is established regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If you win the push order bell, if you operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the correct operation order, you will win the bell regardless of the operation timing, and if you operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the incorrect operation order, you will win the bell prize. Regardless of the situation, the supplementary role will be awarded. If a one-card winning combination is won, a supplementary winning combination is established regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. In the case of winning a watermelon, winning a cherry, winning BB1, and winning BB2, you must operate the stop switches 42 to 44 at a predetermined timing, aiming at the winning symbol. If so, the corresponding prize will be awarded.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S1010, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001. In other words, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command has been generated is determined, the next stop command is determined in step S1008 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has been generated has actually stopped. Determine whether it has occurred. Therefore, the player can continuously issue stop commands without waiting for the reels to stop. Note that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process) but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process described above. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel where the stop command has occurred is equal to the stop symbol number, and if they are equal, the reel where the stop command has occurred is controlled by performing a brake process. make it stop.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S1012, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the following step S1013, it is determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the player remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the process advances to step S1014, and it is determined whether or not an instruction monitor, which will be described later, is being displayed. If the instruction monitor is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S1015. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S1016 is to wait for the brake processing to be completed in the stepping motor control processing and for the swinging of the reel to converge.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process advances to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, first a payout determination process is performed. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If a prize has not been won, the payout determination process is immediately terminated, and if a prize has been won, the winning condition device is further set in correspondence with the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. Determine whether or not there is. If the winning condition device corresponds to the winning flag, the winning condition device and the number of payouts corresponding to the condition device are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106, and the payout determination process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the winning condition device does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. When the payout determination process is completed, a winning result command is transmitted to make the display control device 81 grasp the winning condition device in the current game round.

When the winning result command is transmitted, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether or not a re-game win has been established based on the condition device set in the payout determination process. If a re-game win has not been established, the medal payout process is directly ended, and if a re-game win has been established, a re-game setting process is performed and the medal payout process is ended. In addition, in the start waiting process S204 described above, automatic input processing is performed when it is determined that the replay setting process has been performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals.

Next, the game section process in step S214 will be described later, and the BB state process in step S215 will be explained.

In the BB state processing, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the BB state. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether the BB1 winning flag or the BB2 winning flag is set. If none of the BB winning flags are set, a status command is sent to the display control device 81, and the BB status processing is ended. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming status at the end of the game (that is, the gaming status of the next game), and is set in the status information storage area 106c. Send the configuration flags and corresponding status commands.

If any BB winning flag is set, it is determined whether or not the corresponding BB winning has been achieved based on the condition device set in the previous payout determination process. If the corresponding BB winning has not been achieved, a status command is transmitted and the BB status processing is ended. When the corresponding BB winning is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared. At this time, if the BB1 winning is established, a BB1 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game counter provided in the status information storage area 106c. If the BB2 winning is established, a BB2 setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c, and 30 is set in the remaining BB game counter provided in the status information storage area 106c. Thereafter, a status command is sent and the BB status processing is completed.

If the current gaming state is the BB state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining BB games counter, and it is determined whether the value of the remaining BB games counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the remaining BB game number counter is not 0, the BB status processing ends after transmitting the status command. When the value of the remaining BB game number counter becomes 0, it means that the condition for ending the BB state is satisfied, so the BB setting flag is cleared. Thereafter, a status command is sent and the BB status processing is completed.

As described above, when the BB1 setting flag or the BB2 setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the gaming state remains in the BB state until 30 games are played. In the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, only a 3-coin game is possible, and a supplementary prize winning in which a 1-coin prize is always won and 1 medal is paid out is established. Therefore, when transitioning to the BB state based on the BB1 setting flag, the player will reduce the number of owned medals by 60 (=(3-1)×30) until the BB state ends. In the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, only a two-coin game is possible, and a supplementary prize winning in which a one-coin prize is always won and one medal is paid out is established. Therefore, when transitioning to the BB state based on the BB2 setting flag, the player will reduce the number of owned medals by 30 (=(2-1)×30) until the BB state ends.

In this slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages two types of gaming states, a normal state and a BB state, and also manages two types of gaming sections, a normal section and an advantageous section. There is.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the transition of game sections.

The normal section is a game section in which a transition lottery can be performed to determine whether or not to transfer to an advantageous section. In the normal section, if the push order bell is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. For this reason, in the normal period, if you are playing a 2-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.95 medals each time you play a game, and if you are playing a 3-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.91 medals each time you play a 3-card game. A decrease in medals is expected. If the player wins the lottery for shifting to an advantageous section, the game section shifts to the advantageous section.

The advantageous section is a game section in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be notified if the push order bell is won. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section in that the order of operations can be notified. The advantageous section is made up of two game modes: chance mode and notification mode. If you win the lottery to move to the advantageous section in the normal section, you will move to the chance mode for the advantageous section. When 1,500 games are played in the advantageous section and when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. More specifically, the case where the difference in the number of medals in an advantageous section reaches 2400 is a case where the increase in the number of medals owned by a player in the advantageous section reaches 2400 without becoming 0. In other words, the difference in the number of medals owned by a player in the advantageous section reaches 2400. This is a case where the difference in the number of medals from the base point when the number of owned medals decreased the most reaches 2400.

The chance mode is a game mode in which a transition lottery is held to determine whether or not to transition to the notification mode. The chance mode ends when the transition lottery is won or when a predetermined number of games are played under the chance mode. When the chance mode ends, the mode shifts to the notification mode. In the chance mode, as in the normal section, if the push order bell is won, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. Therefore, in chance mode, if you are playing a 2-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.95 medals each time you play a game, and if you are playing a 3-card game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.91 medals each time you play a 3-card game. A decrease in medals is expected.

The notification mode is a game mode in which, in a 3-coin game, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish a bell winning prize when the push order bell is won is notified. Therefore, in the notification mode, if it is a 2-card game, it is expected that about 0.95 medals will be reduced each time one game is played, while if it is a 3-card game, it is expected that about 3.5 medals will be reduced every time one game is played. It is expected that the number of medals will increase. The notification mode ends when the net increase in the number of medals reaches a predetermined number under the notification mode. When the notification mode ends, the advantageous section also ends and the mode shifts to the normal section.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 has a gaming feature in which the number of owned medals is increased by playing a three-coin game under the notification mode.

Below, various processes performed by the main control device 101 when managing the game section will be explained with reference to the flowcharts from FIG. 25 onwards. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand, various processes performed by the main control device 101 in each game section will be explained individually.

First, processing in the normal section will be explained.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the normal section. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the current game is a three-copy game. If it is a 3-coin game, the process advances to step S1302, and it is determined whether a winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a, that is, whether any winning combination has been won. If the winning flag is set, the process advances to step S1303, and it is determined whether the winning flag was set in the current game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the event of winning BB2 does not occur in the three-coin game. Therefore, if the only winning flag set is the BB2 winning flag, it is determined that the winning flag was not set in the current game, and if a winning flag other than the BB2 winning flag is set, , it is determined that the winning flag was set in the current game. If the winning flag is the one set in the current game, a transition flag is set in step S1304, and the section indicator 66 is turned on in step S1305, and the process ends. If the current game is a 2-coin game, if the winning flag is not set, or if the winning flag is set but was not set in the current game, this process will end immediately. do.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the normal section. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S1401, it is determined whether the transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that you have won the transition lottery in this game. In such a case, advantageous section transition processing shown in steps S1402 to S1408 is performed.

In the advantageous section transition process, the transition flag is cleared in step S1402. In step S1403, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to an advantageous flag, and in step S1404, the section game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0. In the subsequent step S1405, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to a chance flag. In step S1406, 700 is set in the transition game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. In step S1407, the mode game number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0, and in step S1408, the difference sheet number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d is set to 0.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the transition flag is not set, or if the difference number counter is set to 0 in step S1408, a section command is sent in step S1409, and the process ends. . Here, the section command refers to various information regarding the game section at the end of the game (i.e., the game section and game mode of the next game, if it is an advantageous section, the number of games played in the advantageous section, and the number of games played in the game mode) This is a command sent to the display control device 81 to make it grasp the number of times, etc.), and in step S1409, it corresponds to the game section flag, the game mode flag, and the values of various counters set in the section information storage area 106d. Send interval command.

As described above, when a winning combination is won in the 3-card game in the normal section, the game shifts to the chance mode in the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 13, for example, in the case of "Setting 3", if the BB1 winning flag and BB2 winning flag are not carried over, there is only about a 1/13 probability that a loss will occur, and the BB1 winning flag or BB2 winning flag will be lost. If the flag is carried over, there is only about a 1 in 6.4 probability that a miss will occur. Therefore, if three cards are played in the normal section, the game will be completed in several games. Note that when playing a two-coin game, the game does not shift to the advantageous section regardless of whether the winning combination is correct or not.

Next, processing in the chance mode of the advantageous section will be explained.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in chance mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the current game is a three-copy game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S1502, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. In this slot machine 10, watermelon and cherry are set as rare combinations, so in step S1502, it is determined whether the watermelon winning flag or the cherry winning flag is set. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S1503, and a transition lottery is performed to determine whether to transition to the notification mode. In the transition lottery in the chance mode, the winning flag is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination. In step S1504, it is determined whether the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery is won, the transition flag is set in step S1505, and then the present process is ended; if the transition lottery is not won, the present process is ended without setting the transition flag. If the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, the process is ended without performing the transition lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S1601, end determination processing is performed.

In the end determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, 1 is added to the value of the section game number counter in step S1701, and it is determined in step S1702 whether the value of the section game number counter has reached 1500. . If the value of the section game number counter is not 1500, the process advances to step S1706, and it is determined whether or not a replay win has been established. If the replay winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1707, and a difference number adjustment process is performed to change the value of the difference number counter.

In the difference number adjustment process, the medal bet number (3 or 2 in this embodiment) is subtracted from the number of medals paid out in the current game, and the result of the subtraction is added to the difference number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is 0 or more. If the value of the difference number counter is less than 0, the difference number adjustment process ends after changing the value of the difference number counter to 0, and if the value of the difference number counter is 0 or more, the difference number is changed as is. Finish the adjustment process. In addition, the reason why the difference number adjustment process is not performed when a replay winning is established is because the result of subtracting the number of medal bets from the number of medals paid out in the current game is 0, so it is necessary to perform the difference number adjustment process. That's because there isn't.

In the case where it is determined in step S1706 that a re-game winning has been established, and in the case where the difference number adjustment process is performed in step S1707, it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400 in step S1708. judge. If the value of the difference number counter is less than or equal to 2400, the process is immediately terminated.

When it is determined in step S1702 that the value of the section game number counter is 1500, and when it is determined that the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2400 in step S1708, there are advantages shown in steps S1703 to S1705. Perform section end processing and end this processing. In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1703, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S1704. In step S1705, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

Returning to the explanation of the game section process, in step S1602, it is determined whether the current game section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S1601, so a section command is sent in step S1610. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S1603, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a three-copy game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game counter in step S1604, and it is determined in step S1605 whether or not a transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that you have won the lottery to transition to the notification mode, so the transition flag is cleared in step S1606, and the information is stored in the section information storage area 106d in step S1608. Change the current game mode flag to the notification flag. In step S1609, 120 is set in the net increase number counter provided in the section information storage area 106d. After that, a section command is transmitted in step S1610, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1605 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode was not won. In such a case, the process advances to step S1607, and it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the section command is transmitted in step S1610, and then the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag in step S1608, and the process proceeds to step S1609. and set 120 in the net increase number counter. After that, a section command is transmitted in step S1610, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the current game is a 2-coin game instead of a 3-coin game, a section command is sent in step S1610 without updating the mode game number counter, and the process ends. do.

As described above, even if the player does not win the transition lottery from the chance mode, if he plays three games corresponding to the value of the transition game number counter, the game shifts to the notification mode. The value set in the transition game number counter at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is 700. Therefore, the event in which the value of the section game number counter becomes 1500 in the end determination process of the game section process (step S1702, see FIG. 21) will not occur if the three-coin game is played. In addition, since the expected value of the increase or decrease in the number of medals in the chance mode is -0.91 (3 medal game) or -0.95 (2 medal game), the value of the difference number counter in the end determination process of the game section process. An event in which the value exceeds 2400 (step S1708, see FIG. 21) also does not occur. In other words, in the present slot machine 10, when a three-copy game is performed, an event in which the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section under the chance mode does not occur.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be explained.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the current game is a three-copy game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S1803, and an additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the net increase number counter. In the additional lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. By the way, in the add-on lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, you have about a 1 in 5 chance of winning one of 30, 50, 100, or 300 add-on tickets, and if you win a cherry, you have about a 3 in 1 chance to win. With a probability of 1, you will win one of 10, 20, 30, and 50 additional coins. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. When winning the add-on lottery, an add-on flag is set in step S1805, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S1806. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that the player has won the add-on lottery and the number of add-on coins to be added to the value of the net increase number counter. In step S1807, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the net increase number counter. After that, this process ends. If the player does not win the bonus lottery, the process ends without setting the bonus flag. If the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, the process is ended without performing the additional lottery.

Here, specific processing performed in the notification mode in the reel control processing will be explained.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S401, pseudo game determination processing is performed.

In the pseudo game determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the current game mode is the notification mode, and if it is not the notification mode, the process is directly ended. If the current gaming mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S502, and it is determined whether the add-on flag is set. When the add-on flag is set, that is, when the add-on lottery is won, the add-on flag is cleared in step S503, and a pseudo game flag is set in step S504, and the present process ends. When the add-on flag is not set, that is, when the add-on lottery is not won, a pseudo-game lottery is performed to determine whether or not to play a pseudo-game in step S505. In the pseudo-game lottery, the winning flag is set and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination is used to determine whether the winning combination is correct or not. In step S506, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game lottery has been won, and if the pseudo-game lottery has not been won, the process is directly ended. If the pseudo game lottery is won, a pseudo game flag is set in step S504, and the process ends.

As described above, in the notification mode, a pseudo game flag is set in the case of winning the additional lottery and the case of winning the pseudo game lottery, and a pseudo game is performed in the corresponding game round.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In the notification mode, an image of the young character walking along the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is displayed on the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65. In FIG. 31(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65 displays that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is played, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated while aiming at the "red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. 31(b). The auxiliary display section 65 displays a notification prompting the player to play the game, and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game. At this time, the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. Then, when the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stops on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. 31(c), a notification that the current game is a pseudo-game In addition, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that 100 sheets will be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in FIG. 31(d), rotation starts from the left reel 32L. At this time, on the auxiliary display section 65, the notification that it is a pseudo game is finished, and the image of the young character walking on the road and the fact that the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode has increased to 184 are displayed. The player is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the real game.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing another example of the rotation mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when a pseudo game is played.

In FIG. 32(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and it is displayed in the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65 that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is played, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated while aiming at the "red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. 32(b). The auxiliary display section 65 displays a notification prompting the player to play the game, and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game. At this time, the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the current game is a pseudo-game. In addition to the notification, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the information will not be added. When the pseudo game ends, as shown in FIG. 32(d), rotation starts from the left reel 32L. At this time, on the auxiliary display section 65, if the push order bell is won, the notification that it is a pseudo game is finished, and the order of operations that can make the bell win and the remaining payout until the end of the notification mode is displayed. It is displayed that the number remains 84, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the real game. If the middle left and right bells have been won, the operation order "213" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 32(d).

As described above, in this slot machine 10, when playing a pseudo game, the game progresses in the order of pseudo game → main game in one game round. Therefore, below, the reel control processing in the pseudo game will be explained in order.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 15, in step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-gaming flag indicating that a pseudo-gaming has been performed is set. If the post-pseudo-game flag is not set, that is, if the pseudo-game is not being played, the process advances to step S607, and acceleration of the reels is started in accordance with the value of the repetition counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S610, and it is determined whether the pseudo-game post-game flag is set. If the post-pseudo-gaming flag is not set, the process ends immediately.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information for reel stop control in this game is set. In the first step S403, the stop information is not set, so the process proceeds to step S404, and a stop information setting process is performed to set the stop information. That is, in the present slot machine 10, the stop information for the present game is set after performing the rotation start process for the pseudo game, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game. Thereafter, in step S405, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed.

In the command transmission process 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 18, a pseudo game rotation start command is set in step S701. In step S702, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S705, and a pseudo game rotation start command is sent to the display control device 81. After that, this process ends. The display control device 81 starts the auxiliary performance for the pseudo game shown in FIG. 31(b) etc. by receiving the pseudo game rotation start command.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if the command transmission process 1 ends in step S406, the process advances to step S407, and it is determined whether or not there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process proceeds to step S408, and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

Here, the instruction monitor is a display unit that notifies the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can make a bell win, and is managed by the main control device 101. In this slot machine 10, the payout number display section 62 has a function as an instruction monitor, and when the left middle right bell is won, the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 must be operated in this order. If it is possible to make a winning prize, "1" is displayed on the payout number display section 62. If the center right/left bell is won, "2" is displayed on the payout number display section 62, and if the right, left or middle bell is won, "3" is displayed on the payout number display section 62. If the left/right middle bell is won, "4" is displayed on the payout number display section 62; if the middle left/right bell is won, "5" is displayed on the payout number display section 62; If the right middle left bell is won, "6" is displayed on the payout number display section 62.

Now, in the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not a pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process is ended without displaying the instruction monitor. That is, in the pseudo game, even if the push order bell is won, the instruction monitor does not display the order of operations that can make the bell win. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S409, command transmission process 2 is performed.

In the command transmission process 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, it is determined in step S901 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S903, and a pseudo stop enable command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo-stoppable command, the display control device 81 grasps that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed in the pseudo game. Further, in step S903, by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, the player etc. are informed that it is now possible to generate a pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. Thereafter, the command transmission process 2 is ended.

When the command transmission process 2 is completed, the process advances to step S410 and a stop control process is performed.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, it is determined in step S1001 whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1002, and it is determined whether a cancel operation to end the pseudo game has been performed. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has not been performed, the process advances to step S1008, and it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated in the pseudo game, that is, whether a pseudo stop command has been generated. If a pseudo-stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S1001. When a pseudo-stop command is generated, the process proceeds to step 1009, and a stop position determination process is performed to pseudo-stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 22, in step S1101, the symbol number of the reached symbol is acquired. In step S1102, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S1103, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1104, and the pseudo game stop information is referred to. In the ROM 105 of the main control device 101, a slip table (stop table) for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win and a slip table for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win are stored in advance. The slip table is stored, and in step S1104, the slip table corresponding to the trigger for executing the pseudo game is referred to. Here, the sliding table is a table that determines how far the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be slid (rotated) and then pseudo-stopped from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, the sliding table is capable of deriving the relationship between the reaching symbol that has reached the base position when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed and the pseudo-stop symbol that actually causes the symbol to pseudo-stop at the base position. This is a group of outage data.

FIG. 33 is a slip table that is referred to in a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win. A symbol with a number having a sliding number of 0 is a symbol that actually pseudo-stops at the lower stage. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated while the "Replay" symbol No. 15 on the left reel 32L has reached the lower row, the left reel 32L will pseudo-stop without slipping, and the "Replay" symbol No. 16 will stop. ” The pattern pseudo-stops in the middle. Also, a symbol whose number of slides is not 0 means that the reel will slide by the number of symbols listed. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated while the 11th "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L has reached the bottom row, the left reel 32L will slide by 4 symbols, and the 15th "Replay" symbol will move. It pseudo-stops in the lower row, and the 16th "red 7" symbol also pseudo-stops in the middle row. In this way, in the slip table, the number of slips when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reach the lower stage is set for each symbol number. In the sliding table shown in FIG. 33, the 16th "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will pseudo-stop in the middle row, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44.

FIG. 34 is a slip table that is referred to in a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win. In such a sliding table, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44, the 16th "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M pseudo-stops in the middle row, while the 16th "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R The "Red 7" symbol will pseudo-stop at the bottom row instead of the middle row.

Returning to the description of the stop position determination process, in step S1105, a pseudo stop command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the pseudo-stop command, the display control device 81 determines which stop switch was operated to generate the pseudo-stop command and which reel is to be pseudo-stopped. Further, in step S1106, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the pseudo stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby informing the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the pseudo stop command in the pseudo game. In step S1107, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is acquired based on the referenced pseudo game stop information. Thereafter, in step S1108, the acquired number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopping symbol that is actually caused to pseudo-stop at the base position. In step S1109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, and if the pseudo game flag is set, the process is directly ended.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S1010, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S1001.

If it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S1012, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the subsequent step S1013, it is determined whether all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, and if any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is being operated, the process remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the process advances to step S1014, and it is determined whether or not the instruction monitor is being displayed. Since the instruction monitor is not displayed in the pseudo game, this process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S1016.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the stop control process is completed, the process advances to step S411, and it is determined whether or not the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S412, and a transition preparation process is performed to transition to the main game.

In the migration preparation process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 23, an operation wait timer is set in step S1201 (approximately 3.0 seconds in this embodiment). In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the value of the operation wait timer has become 0. Note that the value of the operation wait timer is subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. If the value of the operation wait timer is not 0, the process returns to step S1202. If it is determined in step S1202 that the start lever 41 has been operated, or if it is determined in step S1203 that the value of the operation wait timer has become 0, a pseudo-game post flag is set in step S1204, and the main processing end.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, when the transition preparation process is completed, the process returns to step S402 and a rotation start process is performed.

In the rotation start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, in step S601, a repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S602, it is determined whether a post-pseudo-gaming flag indicating that a pseudo-gaming has been performed is set. As described above, when a pseudo game is performed, since the post-pseudo game flag is set in the transition preparation process, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step S604, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can make the bell win is displayed on the instruction monitor. Further, in step S604, an operation order command indicating the order of operations to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the operation order command, the display control device 81 displays on the auxiliary display section 65 the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can make a bell win possible. Therefore, the operation order is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 a little later than the timing at which the operation order is displayed on the instruction monitor.

If the instruction monitor is displayed in step S604, or if it is determined in step S603 that the push order bell has not been won, the process proceeds to step S605 and the delay time is acquired. The RAM 106 of the main control device 101 is provided with a delay timer for determining the start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R that has been pseudo-stopped, and in step S605, a random number is acquired and A value (ie, a value obtained by a predetermined lottery) is set in a delay timer. Note that the value of the delay timer is subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S108, see FIG. 10) of the timer interrupt process. In step S606, the process waits until the value of the delay timer becomes 0, and when the value of the delay timer becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S607 and starts accelerating the reels according to the value of the repetition counter. In step S608, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition counter. In step S609, it is determined whether or not the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S602. If the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S610, and it is determined whether the pseudo-game post-game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is set, the pseudo game flag is cleared in step S611, and the pseudo game flag is cleared in step S612, and the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not stop information is set. In step S403 after performing the pseudo game, since the stop information has already been set, a negative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S405 without performing the stop information setting process. In step S405, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S406, command transmission processing 1 is performed. In command transmission processing 1 after playing the pseudo game, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. By receiving the rotation start command, the display control device 81 starts the auxiliary presentation for the main game shown in FIG. 31(d) and the like.

In step S407, it is determined whether there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process proceeds to step S408, and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 19, it is determined in step S801 whether or not the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S802, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, it is further determined in step S803 whether or not a pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, in step S804, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish a bell prize is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the process ends. Further, in step S804, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. However, after performing the pseudo game, the operation order has already been displayed on the instruction monitor in the rotation start process (step S604, see FIG. 17), so the display content on the instruction monitor changes by performing the process of step S804. There's nothing to do. In other words, it can be said that the process of step S804 is a process for displaying the instruction monitor in a game round in which a pseudo game is not performed.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, the command transmission process 2 in step S409 and the stop control process in step S410 are the same as described in the reel control process in this game, so the explanation will be omitted. When the stop control process is completed, the process advances to step S411, and it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set. If the pseudo game flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated.

This slot machine 10 has a configuration that allows the pseudo game to be canceled and transferred to the real game. Therefore, such a configuration will be specifically explained below based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1002, and it is determined whether a cancel operation has been performed to end the pseudo game. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, since the settlement switch 59 has a function as a cancel operation means, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If a cancel operation has been performed, the process advances to step S1003, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is 3, that is, whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo game flag is cleared in step S1004, and the above-mentioned instruction monitor display process is performed in step S1005. In the following step S1006, a pseudo game end command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that the pseudo game has been canceled by receiving the pseudo game end command. Thereafter, the process waits for 30 msec in step S1007, and returns to step S1001. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 30 msec in step S1007 is to wait for the display control device 81 to switch from the auxiliary performance for the pseudo game to the auxiliary performance for the main game.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the rotation mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 when the pseudo game is cancelled.

In the notification mode, an image of the young character walking along the road is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode is displayed on the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65. In FIG. 35(a), a bell win was established in the previous game, and the upper right corner of the auxiliary display section 65 displays that there are 84 coins remaining until the end of the notification mode. When a pseudo game is played, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated while aiming at the "Red 7" symbol, as shown in FIG. 35(b). The auxiliary display section 65 displays a notification prompting the player to play the game, and a notification that the current game is a pseudo game. At this time, the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode is not displayed. If a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will remain as they are without pseudo-stopping, as shown in FIG. 35(c). Move on to the main game. At this time, on the auxiliary display section 65, the notification that the pseudo game is a pseudo game is finished without notifying the result of the pseudo game in detail, whether or not it has been added, and the young character is shown taking a walk on the road. , the remaining number of payouts until the end of the notification mode, and the number of payouts remaining until the end of the notification mode are displayed, and it is notified that the pseudo game has shifted to the main game. However, if you have won the additional lottery, the number of remaining payouts until the end of the notification mode is updated from 84 to 184 and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35(c).

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, if it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 3, that is, if the cancel operation is performed in a situation where at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, the cancel operation is performed. After setting a cancel operation flag indicating that the cancel operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step 1009, and a stop position determination process is performed to pseudo-stop the rotating reels. Thereafter, in step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, it means that the remaining one reel is rotating, so the process returns to step S1001, makes an affirmative determination in step S1001, and proceeds to step S1002. . In step S1002, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed based on the fact that the cancel operation flag is set. Thereafter, a negative determination is made in step S1003, and a stop position determination process is performed in step S1009. In step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter becomes 0, the cancel operation flag is cleared and then the processing from step S1011 onward is performed.

As mentioned above, if a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are spinning, the game will proceed as it is without causing all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to pseudo-stop, If a cancel operation is performed while at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the main game is started after all the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S1901, the above-mentioned end determination process is performed, and in step S1902, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S1901, so a section command is sent in step S1908. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current gaming section is an advantageous section, in step S1903, a net increase number updating process is performed to update the value of the net increase number counter. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in the current game is subtracted from the value of the net increase number counter, and the number of medal bets (in this embodiment, 3 or 2) is added to the subtraction result. In step S1904, it is determined whether the value of the net increase number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the net increase number counter is not 0, the section command is sent in step S1908, and then the process ends. When the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, advantageous section end processing shown in steps S1905 to S1907 is performed, and a section command is transmitted in step S1908, and this processing ends. In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S1905, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S1906. In step S1907, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

Here, the gameplay of this slot machine 10 will be explained.

This slot machine 10 allows two-coin games and three-coin games. However, if you play a two-card game in the normal section, even if you win some combination, you will not move to the advantageous section. In addition, when playing a two-coin game in an advantageous section, if the game mode at that time is the notification mode, even if the push order bell is won, the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated will not be notified. If the game mode is the chance mode, the transfer lottery will not be performed. In addition, in a two-card game, while the mode game number counter that triggers the transition to the notification mode is not updated, the section game number counter that triggers the transition to the normal zone is updated (end determination processing , see Figure 29). Furthermore, in a two-coin game, the probability of winning BB2 is approximately 1/4.0, and if the BB2 prize is achieved, it is necessary to reduce the number of owned medals by 30 over 30 games. Therefore, when comparing a two-card game and a three-card game, the three-card game is more advantageous for the player.

In a 3-coin game, the probability of winning BB1 is approximately 1/12, and if the BB1 prize is achieved, it is necessary to reduce the number of owned medals by 60 medals over 30 games. However, if a 3-coin game is performed with the BB2 winning flag carried over, an event that results in a winning of BB1 does not occur, and an event that results in a BB2 winning does not occur. Therefore, playing a three-coin game while carrying over the BB2 winning flag is the most advantageous game for the player. Therefore, below, a description will be given of the gameplay when a three-coin game is performed with the BB2 winning flag carried over.

In the normal section, if you win any winning combination in the 3-card game, it means that you have won the lottery to move to the advantageous section. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/2 of winning some combination, and a probability of about 1/6.4 of winning. Therefore, if three cards are played in the normal section, the game will be completed in approximately one game.

When shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the game starts from the chance mode and 700 is set as the number of transition games (see FIG. 26).

In the chance mode, if you win a rare combination, a lottery will be held to switch to the notification mode. If you win the transition lottery, you will transition from the chance mode to the notification mode. Furthermore, even if the transition lottery is not won, if the 3-coin game is played 700 times under the chance mode, the transition is made to the notification mode (S1603, S1604, S1607, see FIG. 28). In other words, in this slot machine 10, when transitioning from the normal section to the chance mode, 700 times functions as a so-called ceiling number of times. The advantageous section ends when 1,500 games are played and when the difference in number of coins reaches 2,400 coins, regardless of the game mode at that time. When shifting to the notification mode based on reaching the ceiling 700 times, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 800 times. In the notification mode, the operation order is always notified when the push order bell is won, so it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 3.5 medals each time you play one game. If it is assumed that the game in the notification mode can be played 800 times, an increase of about 2,700 medals can be expected. Therefore, even if the mode is shifted to the notification mode based on reaching the ceiling, it can be expected that the difference in number of coins will reach 2400 coins and the advantageous period will end before playing the 1500th game.

When shifting from the chance mode to the notification mode, 120 is set in the net increase number counter (see FIG. 28). Therefore, when shifting to the notification mode, an increase of at least 120 medals can be expected. Furthermore, if a rare combination is won under the notification mode, an additional lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of net additional coins (see FIG. 30). At this time, if you win the additional lottery based on winning a watermelon, either 30, 50, 100, or 300 will be added, and if you win the additional lottery based on winning a cherry, 10, 20, 30, 50 will be added. Either is added. Then, when the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, the notification mode and the advantageous section end and the mode shifts to the normal section (see FIG. 36).

When winning the additional lottery, a pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is performed in the game. In the pseudo game based on the additional lottery winning, the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stops on the middle line L2, and the number of additional coins to be added to the net increase number counter is announced. Further, even if the player does not win the additional lottery, if he wins the pseudo game lottery, the pseudo game flag is set and a pseudo game is performed in the game. Pseudo game In a pseudo game based on lottery winning, the "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M pseudo stops on the middle line L2, while the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R pseudo stops on the middle line L2. It is reported that the process does not stop and no addition is made to the net increase number counter. These pseudo games can be canceled by operating the settlement switch 59. If you operate the settlement switch 59 while all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are spinning, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will move to the main game without pseudo-stopping, and at least one If the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where the reels are pseudo-stopped, the main game begins after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The configuration is such that if the player wins the additional lottery, a pseudo game is executed. In the pseudo game, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the corresponding reel pseudo stops. Then, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a pseudo stop, the pseudo game ends. By having a configuration that allows execution of such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the reels, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a pseudo game. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to be able to end the pseudo game if the settlement switch 59 is operated during the execution of the pseudo game. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent players who find it troublesome to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a simulated game from losing their desire to play when the simulated game starts. Become.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When a settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo game is ended without pseudo-stopping each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which the pseudo-stop result of the symbols in the pseudo game cannot be grasped unless the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the pseudo game. It is possible to encourage this.

When a pseudo game is executed, the main game is executed after the pseudo game ends. By adopting such a configuration, if the pseudo game can be ended as it is without each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo stopping, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will stop at the stage of starting the next game. This makes it possible to avoid occurrence of events that have not occurred. In addition, in such a configuration, when the payment switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is pseudo-stopped or restarted. It becomes possible to proceed to the determination of whether or not a stop command has occurred without causing any problems. Therefore, it is possible to quickly transition from a pseudo game to a real game.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo game is ended after all the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped. With this configuration, a player who wants to end the pseudo game without operating the stop switches 42 to 44 during the pseudo game can operate the stop switches 42 to 44 by operating the settlement switch 59. It becomes possible to end the pseudo game without having to do so.

When the settlement switch 59 is operated during execution of a pseudo game, the subsequent processing changes depending on the value of the reel rotation number counter. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the situation in which the settlement switch 59 is operated, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game. For example, when the payment switch 59 is operated, it is also possible to have a configuration in which all rotating reels are always pseudo-stopped. However, with such a configuration, there is a concern that the significance of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo game will be lost. Such concerns become more pronounced in the case of a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which the result of stopping symbols in a pseudo game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. However, if a configuration is adopted in which the subsequent processing changes depending on the value of the reel rotation number counter, the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved.

The system is configured to play a pseudo game when winning the additional lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to use the pseudo game as a game to notify that the number of net additional coins will increase, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In the pseudo game, if the combination of "Red 7" symbols pseudo-stopped on the middle line L2, it was announced that the net increase in number of coins would increase, and the combination of "Red 7" symbols did not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2. In this case, the system does not notify that the net increase in the number of sheets will increase. With this configuration, players who wish to receive notification of an increase in the number of net added coins are urged to operate the stop switches 42 to 44, while allowing players who do not need to receive notification of an increase in the number of net added coins to operate the settlement switch 59. becomes possible.

Furthermore, the result of stopping the symbols in the pseudo game does not directly contribute to the increase in the number of coins. In the main game, you cannot receive benefits such as medal payouts unless you win a prize, but in the pseudo game, the net increase in the number of coins has already been determined by the additional lottery, so the combination of "Red 7" symbols Even if the player does not pseudo-stop on the middle line L2, the player will not be disadvantaged. If the combination of "Red 7" symbols does not come to a pseudo stop on the middle line L2, an increase in the net number of coins will not be notified. In this way, by making the simulated game unrelated to the player's direct profits, it becomes possible to position the simulated game as one of the productions in which the player can actively participate, and the operation of the settlement switch 59 This makes it possible to avoid putting the player at a disadvantage, making it possible to improve the player's enjoyment of the game.

If the player wins the additional lottery, a pseudo game is played in the game. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Certainly, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a pseudo game is played in a game different from the game won in the additional lottery. However, with such a configuration, if the player forgets that he won a rare combination in a game before the pseudo game starts, the player may recognize the pseudo game as a so-called fake game. There is a concern that the stop switches 42 to 44 may not be operated while aiming for the "Red 7" symbol. Additionally, if the player wins a rare combination in the final game of the notification mode and ends the notification mode without winning the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the player may suspect that the additional lottery itself was not performed. There are also concerns. On the other hand, if the game is configured to perform a pseudo game in which the player wins the additional lottery, the flow of the game will be from the pseudo game to the real game, and each of the above concerns can be appropriately resolved. be.

Even if the player does not win the additional lottery, the pseudo game is played if he wins the pseudo game lottery. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to provide an opportunity to be notified of an increase in the net increase in the number of coins and an opportunity to be notified of an increase in the net increase in the number of coins in the pseudo game, and it is possible to improve gaming interest. .

When playing a pseudo game, the auxiliary display section 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo game. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly assuming that one game has ended when the pseudo game ends. Furthermore, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R transition from a pseudo game to a real game without stopping, the player will not be able to tell whether it is a pseudo game or a real game. It is possible to avoid this.

When performing a pseudo game in a game in which a push order bell is won, the system is configured to notify the operation order that can establish a bell prize after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the above-mentioned order of operation in a pseudo game. Further, the above-mentioned operation order is notified after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are brought to a pseudo-stop, but before acceleration of the reels that have been pseudo-stopped is started. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid the situation where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the above-mentioned operation order in this game, and it becomes impossible to establish a bell win.

In a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, the system is configured such that the operation order that can make a bell win is announced after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R reach a constant speed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the above-mentioned operation order in the main game different between a game round in which a pseudo game is executed and a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed. In this way, the configuration ensures that the above-mentioned operation order is notified before the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 become effective, and the notification timing of the above-mentioned operation order in the main game is varied depending on whether or not a pseudo game is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to alert the player to check the instruction monitor.

When the pseudo game ends, a delay time is set based on random numbers obtained for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and after waiting for the delay time, acceleration of the reels is started. With this configuration, it is possible to shift the start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when transitioning to the main game, and in the pseudo game, the "red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is on the middle line L2. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, it is possible to make the "red 7" symbols not line up even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed. As a result, it is possible to avoid the stop result of the pseudo-game from becoming an aid to the subsequent actual game.

A configuration in which, when notifying the order of operations that can make a bell win, in addition to notifying on the auxiliary display section 65 controlled by the display control device 81, the notification is made on the instruction monitor controlled by the main control device 101. And so. Since the main controller 101 determines whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, with this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated before notifying the above operation order. It is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event that determines whether the

The configuration is such that when the settlement switch 59 is operated, it is determined that an operation to cancel the pseudo game has been performed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player will unintentionally perform a cancel operation. For example, if the start lever 41 is operated after the start of the pseudo game, it may be determined that a cancel operation has been performed. However, with such a configuration, if the player repeatedly presses the start lever 41 when generating a start command, the second and subsequent operations of the start lever 41 are determined to be cancel operations, and the player wanted to enjoy the pseudo game. This is because an event may occur in which the pseudo game ends despite this.

When a pseudo game is executed, the stop information for the main game is set after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated, that is, during the execution of the pseudo game. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which stop information for the main game is set after the pseudo game ends, it is possible to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the main game.

The pseudo game stop information is configured to be set after a pseudo stop command is generated. With this configuration, even if the stop information is set during the execution of a pseudo game, the time required to determine whether a pseudo stop command has occurred in a pseudo game can be shortened. It becomes possible to aim for.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the pseudo-gaming stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated, there is a possibility that the period between when the pseudo-stop command is generated and when the corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped may be extended. is possible. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, in the case of a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win, the "Red 7" symbol number 16 on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed in the middle row regardless of the timing of operation of each stop switch 42 to 44. In the case of a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win, the "Red 7" symbol number 16 on the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M pseudo stops in the middle row, regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch 42 to 44. The 16th "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R is configured to pseudo-stop at the bottom row instead of the middle row. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the stop result of the symbols in the pseudo game does not depend on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to set the stop information for the pseudo game after the pseudo stop command is generated. However, it is possible to prevent the period from when a pseudo-stop command is generated until the corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped from being prolonged.

In the pseudo-game, a pseudo-stop is made after the player slides a maximum of 19 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. With this configuration, it is possible to secure the time to set the pseudo game stop information after the pseudo stop command is generated, the time to determine the reel stop position based on the pseudo game stop information, etc. Become. Furthermore, in this game, the reels must be stopped within a predetermined time after a stop command is issued, so it is difficult to set stop information after a stop command is issued, and It is necessary to set stop information before determining whether a command has occurred. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, since the above-mentioned restrictions are not provided, it is possible to secure each of the above-mentioned times by configuring a pseudo-stop after sliding for a maximum of 19 symbols.

(Second embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the number of additional coins is notified in the pseudo game, but the number of additional coins may be notified in the main game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S2001, a repetition counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S2002, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the rotation start setting table address for the middle reel 32M is obtained. If the value of the repetition counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that the driving control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S2002, the process advances to step S2003, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S2004, it is determined whether the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S2002. When the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S2005, and a stop information setting process for setting stop information is performed. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created according to the result of the determination of the validity of the winning combination, and the creation result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S2006, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S2007, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. In step S2008, it is determined whether there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process advances to step S2009 and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38, it is determined in step S2101 whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, in step S2103, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the process ends. Furthermore, in step S2103, an operation order command indicating the order of operations to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S2010, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, stop control processing is performed in step S2011, and this processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S2201, it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been issued, the system waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command is issued, the process proceeds to step 2202, where a stop position determination process is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, in step S2301, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is acquired based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S2302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S2303, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. Further, in step S2303, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby notifying the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the stop command in this game. In the following step S2304, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S2304, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S2305, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S2306, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been issued to at least one reel, the stop position determination process is ended after the stop information change process is performed in step S2307. When the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, when a stop command is issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is ended without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, when the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S2203, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S2201. In other words, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel for which the stop command has been generated is determined, the next stop command is determined in step S2201 regardless of whether the reel for which the stop command has occurred has actually stopped. Determine whether it has occurred. Therefore, the player can continuously issue stop commands without waiting for the reels to stop. Note that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process) but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel where the stop command has occurred is equal to the stop symbol number, and if they are equal, the reel where the stop command has occurred is controlled by performing brake processing. make it stop.

If it is determined in step S2203 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S2205, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the following step S2206, it is determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the player remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the process advances to step S2207, and an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S2208, it is determined whether the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S2209. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S2210. Incidentally, the reason for waiting 100 msec in step S2210 is to wait for the braking process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the swinging of the reel to converge.

Next, various processes performed by the display control device 81 when executing an additional notification effect that notifies the number of additional sheets will be explained.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process performed at the start stage of a game round.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if it has not been received, the process is immediately terminated. If the lottery result command is received, the process advances to step S2402, and it is determined whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this process is immediately terminated, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not a rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, the process is immediately ended, and if the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S2404 and a performance execution lottery is performed. In the performance execution lottery, a success or failure determination is made based on the type of the winning rare combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81. By the way, in the production execution lottery, if you win a watermelon, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/10, and if you win a cherry, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/2. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the performance execution lottery has been won. If the performance execution lottery is won, the performance flag is set in step S2406, and the present process ends. If the performance execution lottery is not won, the process advances to step S2407, and it is determined whether the add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when winning the add-on lottery, and is sent before the lottery result command when winning the add-on lottery (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the player has won the add-on lottery in the current game round. In such a case, the effect flag is set in step S2406, and the present process is ended. If no additional command has been received, this process is immediately terminated. Note that, when the display control device 81 receives the top-up command, it stores the number of top-up sheets indicated by the top-up command in the top-up sheet number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the performance execution process performed during the execution of this game.

In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect flag is set, and if the effect flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated. If the effect flag is set, it means that an additional notification effect is to be executed, so the process advances to step S2502 and it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If the stop command has not been received, the system waits until the stop command is received, and if the stop command is received, the value of the stop operation counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set in step S2503. Add 1. In step S2504, it is determined whether the value of the stop operation number counter has reached 3. If it has not become 3, in step S2505, a notification sound corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Then, the process returns to step S2502. When the value of the stop operation number counter becomes 3, additional notification processing is performed in step S2506, and then this processing ends.

In the add-on notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, it is determined in step S2601 whether the add-on command has been received, that is, whether or not the add-on lottery has been won in the current game round. If it is the game time in which the bonus lottery is won, the process waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2602. When the all reel stop completion command is received, the process advances to step S2603, and a notification sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Thereafter, in step S2604, the process waits until an operation end command is received. If the operation end command is received, the process advances to step S2605, and the number of additional tickets won in the additional lottery is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Thereafter, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and the present process ends.

If it is determined in step S2601 that the add-on command has not been received, that is, if the player has not won the add-on lottery in the current game round, the process advances to step S2608, and a notification is sent to determine whether or not to output a notification sound. A sound execution lottery will be held. In the notification sound execution lottery, the display control device 81 performs a determination of success or failure based on the acquired random numbers. Incidentally, the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is approximately one-third. In step S2609, it is determined whether the notification sound execution lottery has been won. If the notification sound execution lottery is won, the process waits until an all reel stop completion command is received in step S2610. When the all reel stop completion command is received, the process advances to step S2611, and a notification sound corresponding to the value 3 of the stop operation number counter is output from the speaker 64. Thereafter, in step S2606, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0, and in step S2607, the effect flag is cleared, and the present process ends. If the notification sound execution lottery is not won, the notification sound is not output from the speaker 64, the value of the stop operation number counter is set to 0 in step S2606, and the production flag is cleared in step S2607. This process ends.

Here, the effect of the additional notification effect will be explained.

The additional notification performance is performed when the additional lottery is won and when the performance execution lottery is won.

If the display control device 81 has won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs a first notification sound (for example, a "do" sound), and outputs two notification sounds. When receiving a stop command based on generation of an eye stop command, a second notification sound (for example, a "re" sound) is output. When a stop command based on the third stop command is received, a third notification is sent after receiving an all reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position. After receiving an operation end command that outputs a sound (for example, the sound of "mi") and indicates that all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the number of additional tickets won in the additional lottery is subsidized. It is displayed on the display section 65.

If the display control device 81 has not won the additional lottery and receives a stop command based on the generation of the first stop command, the display control device 81 outputs a first notification sound (for example, a "do" sound), and outputs two notification sounds. When receiving a stop command based on generation of an eye stop command, a second notification sound (for example, a "re" sound) is output. When a stop command based on the third stop command is received, if the notification sound execution lottery is won, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are at the stop position, indicating that all reels have stopped. After receiving the command, a third notification sound (e.g. "mi" sound) is output, and if you do not win the notification sound execution lottery, after receiving the all reel stop completion command, the third notification sound (e.g. "mi" sound) is output. Do not output the “mi” sound).

As mentioned above, in the additional notification performance, if you win the additional lottery, the flow is the first notification sound output → second notification sound output → third notification sound output → notification of the number of additional tickets, and you win the additional lottery. If not, the flow will be first notification sound output → second notification sound output → third notification sound output, or first notification sound output → second notification sound output. Here, for example, in the case of setting 3, the probability of winning the additional lottery is about 1/5 if the watermelon is won, and about 1/3 if the cherry is won. The probability of winning the performance execution lottery is about 1/10 if the watermelon is a winner, and about 1/2 if the cherry is a winner. Therefore, in the case of winning a watermelon, at the stage when the first notification sound is outputted, that is, at the stage when the additional notification effect is started, the expectation level of being notified of the number of additional pieces will be an effect exceeding 66%. In the case of a cherry win, at the stage when the first notification sound is output, that is, at the stage when the additional notification effect is started, the expectation level of being notified of the number of additional coins becomes an effect exceeding 40%. Since the probability of winning the notification sound execution lottery is approximately one-third, when the third notification sound output is output, the expectation level of being notified of the additional number of tickets increases even more than the above percentage. becomes. Since the third notification sound is output after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, the player should continue to operate the stop switch that generated the third stop command to his or her heart's content. It can be terminated after

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the stop control process, when the stop symbol number of the reel where the stop command has occurred is determined, regardless of whether the reel where the stop command has occurred has actually stopped, it is determined whether the next stop command has occurred in step S2201. The configuration is configured to determine whether or not the With this configuration, the player can operate other stop switches without waiting for the reels corresponding to the operated stop switch to stop. As a result, by increasing the operability of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the next stop command has occurred without waiting for the reels to stop, for example, the next game round can be started even when the reels have not stopped. New problems such as storage may arise. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol numbers of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are determined, a standby process is performed in which the player waits for 100 msec. With this configuration, it is possible to stop the swinging of the reel while the standby process is being performed, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after determining that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has become the stop symbol number. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time spent waiting in the standby process, and even if the configuration performs the standby process, it will take a long time until the next game round can be started. This makes it possible to prevent delays.

Indeed, when it is determined that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, before determining whether the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have become the stop symbol number, that is, step S2203. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed during step S2204. However, in the case of such a configuration, the waiting time in the standby process is not only the time for the swinging of the reels to converge, but also the time required for the symbol number of the symbol reached by the reel to become the stopped symbol number (i.e. It is also necessary to consider the reel sliding time. In this slot machine 10, since it is possible to slide a maximum of four symbols, it is necessary to secure approximately 179 msec (=1.49 x 24 x 5) as a standby time in addition to the time for the swinging of the reels to converge. If the reels stop when the number of slides is less than 3 symbols instead of 4 symbols, the waiting time of approximately 36 msec (= 1.49 x 24 x 1) or more will be wasted time, and the game will be delayed. This may lead to On the other hand, if the standby process is performed after determining that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the stop symbol number, each of the above-mentioned concerns can be suitably resolved. Become.

The configuration is such that the standby process of waiting for 100 msec is performed after it is determined that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. By adopting such a configuration, even if the configuration performs standby processing, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started, and the next game round can be started. It becomes possible to improve the operability when For example, if the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the stop symbol number without providing the process S2206 for determining whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which standby processing is performed after the determination. However, in such a configuration, the timing at which the player finishes operating all the stop switches 42 to 44 may be after the end of the standby process or during the standby process. This is because the time required until it becomes possible to start the next game round will change. If the time required to start the next game round changes, an event may occur in which, for example, even if the player performs a medal insertion operation to start the next game round, the operation is not accepted. This is because the operability when starting the next game round is reduced.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec was configured to be performed before the medal payout process. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which a bonus such as a medal payout is given in a situation where the swinging of the reels has not stopped. Furthermore, by configuring the standby process to be performed before the payout determination process performed in the medal payout process, it is possible to suppress the complexity of the process configuration and increase the versatility of the processing program related to the standby process. becomes possible. For example, if it is determined in the payout determination process that a minor prize win has been established, the standby process is not performed or the wait process is performed for a time corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out, and the minor prize win is established in the payout determination process. If it is determined that there is not, it is also possible to perform a standby process of waiting for a predetermined period of time. With such a configuration, the waiting time changes depending on whether medals are paid out or not, so it is possible to prevent the time until the next game round can be started from being extended. However, in such a configuration, the processing configuration becomes complicated, and when the above processing program is applied to another slot machine that has a different number of medals paid out when winning a small prize, it is necessary to change the processing time appropriately. This is because, as a result, versatility is reduced.

In a configuration in which a push order bell is provided as a lottery winning combination, and operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order gives the player an advantage, stop commands can be issued continuously without waiting for the reels to stop. The structure is as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will unintentionally make a mistake in the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. That is, in a configuration in which it is advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the player may unintentionally make a mistake in the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Such an event may occur even though the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, for example, when the reel corresponding to the first stop command is not stopped, the stop switch that should be operated second is This is because the stop switch that was operated third is determined to be the operation of the second stop command, and the operation is not recognized as valid.

The standby process of waiting for 100 msec is configured to be performed after the operation order is hidden if it is being displayed on the instruction monitor. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly finish the notification of the operation order by the instruction monitor and to shorten the waiting time in the standby process. This is because the waiting time in the standby process can be shortened by the time required for the processes in step S2208 and step S2209.

If the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the next stop command has occurred without waiting for the reels to stop, for example, when the operation of all stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, for example, the second stop command is New problems may arise, such as the reel corresponding to the command not stopping, or the operation of at least one stop switch not being completed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If the above-mentioned problem occurs, a problem will arise in the control performed on the display control device 81 side. Therefore, in this slot machine 10, when the main controller 101 side determines the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers. The configuration is such that it is determined whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. Then, when the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the stop symbol number, an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81, and all the stop switches 42 to 44 are The display controller 81 is configured to send an operation end command to the display control device 81 when the display controller 81 is in an unoperated state. With this configuration, the display control device 81 can perform control according to the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the all reel stop completion command, and the display control device 81 can perform control according to the stoppage of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by receiving the all reel stop completion command. By receiving the information, it becomes possible to perform control in accordance with the completion of operations of all the stop switches 42 to 44. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

The main control device 101 is configured to transmit an operation end command after transmitting an all reel stop completion command. With this configuration, the display control device 81 performs control in response to the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and then performs control in response to the completion of the operations of all the stop switches 42 to 44. It becomes possible to perform control. Furthermore, the maximum time required from determining the stop position of the reel where a stop command is issued until the reel actually reaches the stop position is approximately 179 msec in order to slide a maximum of 4 symbols. I can understand it. On the other hand, the time required until all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated depends on the player's operations, and therefore cannot be grasped or predicted by the main control device 101. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the operation end command is sent after the all reel stop completion command is sent, for example, the timing when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and the display control device 81 is It is possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing at which control is performed based on reception and the timing at which control is performed based on reception.

If it is determined that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number, all stop switches 42 to 44 are reset before determining whether or not they are in an unoperated state. The system was configured to send a reel stop completion command. With this configuration, the gap between the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop and the timing at which the display control device 81 performs control based on reception of the all reel stop completion command is reduced. becomes possible. Further, when it is determined that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, an operation end command is sent before determining whether the instruction monitor is being displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the gap that occurs between the timing when the operations of all the stop switches 42 to 44 are completed and the timing when the display control device 81 performs control based on reception of the operation termination command. becomes possible.

The additional notification effect is configured to proceed when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped and when all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, and the additional notification effect is displayed by the display control device. 81 is controlled. In this configuration, depending on which occurs first: all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, or all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. There is a concern that one may not be able to perform the other. In order to eliminate such concerns, for example, when one of the following occurs: all reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped, or all stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, a third notification sound is emitted. It is also possible to have a configuration in which one outputs one and additional notification is executed when the other occurs. However, in such a configuration, the command type received from the main control device 101 and the processing content to be executed no longer correspond, so the processing configuration related to the additional notification effect becomes complicated and the storage capacity increases. A new problem may arise.

On the other hand, the main controller 101 transmits an all reel stop completion command indicating that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, and also indicates that the operations of all stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed. By having a configuration that transmits the operation end command, the display control device 81 can grasp that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the all reel stop completion command, and can recognize that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped by receiving the operation end command. Through this, it can be known that the operations of all stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed. Furthermore, since the main control device 101 transmits the operation end command after transmitting the all reel stop completion command, the display control device 81 controls to output the third notification sound based on reception of the all reel stop completion command. control to execute the additional notification based on the subsequent reception of the operation end command. Therefore, each of the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

In the additional notification performance, the third notification sound is output from the speaker 64 based on the reception of the all reel stop completion command, and the additional notification is executed on the auxiliary display part 65 based on the reception of the operation end command. In this way, by configuring the device that executes the effect based on the reception of the all reels stop completion command and the device that executes the effect based on the reception of the operation end command to be different, the all reels stop completion command Even if the interval between receiving the command and receiving the operation end command is short, it is possible to reliably output the third notification sound.

(Third embodiment)

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20, for example, a command for a pseudo game and a command for a real game are prepared separately, and commands are sent to the display control device 81 depending on the presence or absence of the pseudo game flag. However, this configuration will be changed. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 44(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the pseudo game flag storage area provided in the RAM 106 of the main control device 101. The pseudo game flag storage area consists of 1 byte. In each bit of the pseudo game flag storage area, the most significant 7th bit and the 5th to 0th bits are blank, and the 6th bit functions as a pseudo game flag storage bit. . The main control device 101 sets the 6th bit of the pseudo game flag storage area to "1" when setting the pseudo game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), and when clearing the pseudo game flag (step S611, (see FIG. 17 or step S1004, FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0". Therefore, when the bits in the pseudo game flag storage area are arranged from the high-order side and the numerical value assumed as an 8-digit binary number is converted into hexadecimal, it becomes 40H (01000000) when the pseudo game flag is set, When the pseudo game flag is not set, it becomes 00H (00000000).

Next, command transmission processing 1 in this embodiment will be explained. The command transmission process 1 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S406, see FIG. 15), and is a process of transmitting a rotation start command or a pseudo game rotation start command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission processing 1, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701.

Here, the configuration of the command will be briefly explained. A command is composed of a header indicating the command type, a body indicating specific contents, and a footer indicating that the information is the last information of the command. The header consists of 1 byte, as shown in FIG. 44(b). The function of each bit of the header is as follows. The seventh bit, which is the most significant bit, has a function as a header identification bit, and "1" is always stored therein. The 6th bit has a function as a pseudo game identification bit indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game, the 5th bit is blank, and the 4th to 0th bits indicate the command type. It functions as a command type storage bit. For example, the rotation start header information is 86H, that is, 10000110, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main controller 101 in advance.

When the rotation start header information is acquired in step S2701, the process advances to step S2702, and the pseudo game determination information is added to the rotation start header information. In this embodiment, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area also has a function as pseudo game determination information. Therefore, in step S2702, 40H or 00H is added to 86H, which is the rotation start header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, that is, if the pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S2702 becomes C6H (11000110), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the real game is in progress. In this case, the addition result in step S2702 is 86H (10000110). In step S2703, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2704, it is determined whether there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2705, and the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2706, and the process ends. In addition, in command transmission process 1, since body information is not set in the rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command), the header and footer indicating that it is a rotation start command (pseudo game rotation start command) are It is transmitted to the display control device 81.

Next, command transmission processing 2 in this embodiment will be explained. The command transmission process 2 is a process performed in the reel control process (step S409, see FIG. 15), and is a process of transmitting a stoppable command or a pseudo-stoppable command to the display control device 81.

In command transmission processing 2, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 46, stoppable header information is acquired in step S2801. The stoppable header information is 87H, that is, 10000111, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101 in advance. In step S2802, pseudo game determination information is added to the stoppable header information. That is, in step S2802, 40H or 00H is added to 87H, which is the stoppable header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, that is, if the pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S2802 becomes C7H (11000111), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the real game is in progress. In this case, the addition result in step S2802 is 87H (10000111). In step S2803, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S2804, it is determined whether there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2805, and the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S2806, and the process ends. In addition, in command sending process 2, since body information is not set for the stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command), the display control of the header and footer indicating that it is a stoppable command (pseudo stoppable command) is performed. It is transmitted to the device 81.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the stop position determination process. In the stop position determination process in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, and a pseudo stop command or a stop command is sent to the display control device 81 according to the determination result. It was sent (see Figure 22). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the pseudo game flag is set, but regardless of the determination result, the pseudo stop command or the stop command is not executed in step S2905. In order to send the command, command sending processing 3 is performed.

In command transmission processing 3, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, stop header information is acquired in step S3001. The stop header information is 88H, that is, 10001000, and is stored in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101 in advance. In step S3002, pseudo game determination information is added to the stop header information. That is, in step S3002, 40H or 00H is added to 88H, which is the stop header information. As a result, if the pseudo game flag is set, that is, if the pseudo game is in progress, the addition result in step S3002 becomes C8H (11001000), and if the pseudo game flag is not set, that is, if the real game is in progress. In this case, the addition result in step S3002 is 88H (10001000). In step S3003, the addition result is sent to the display control device 81 as a header. In step S3004, it is determined whether there is body information. If there is body information, the body information is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3005, and the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and this processing ends. If there is no body information, the footer is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S3006, and the process ends. In the command transmission process 3, in step S3005, information indicating the reel where the stop command or pseudo-stop command has been generated is transmitted as body information. More specifically, when the reel is the left reel 32L, 01H is transmitted as body information, and when the reel is the middle reel 32M, 02H is transmitted as the body information, and when the reel is the right reel 32R. In this case, 03H is transmitted as body information. This body information is stored in advance in the ROM 105 of the main control device 101. As a result of the above, in command transmission processing 3, the stop command (pseudo stop command) includes a header indicating that it is a stop command (pseudo stop command), a body indicating a stop reel (pseudo stop reel), and a footer. It is transmitted to the display control device 81.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

The configuration is such that different commands are sent in the case of a pseudo game and the case of a real game. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the display control device 81 to grasp whether the game is a pseudo game or a real game.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the display control device 81 to control auxiliary performances, etc. according to the pseudo game and the main game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the ROM 105 stores in advance the commands to be sent in the case of the pseudo game and the commands to be sent in the case of the real game, there is a concern that the amount of data to be stored in advance will increase. It will be done. In addition, since it is necessary to determine whether or not it is a pseudo game when sending a command, there is a concern that the amount of data will increase due to the addition of the aforementioned determination process, and that the processing configuration will become more complex. That will happen.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in command transmission processing 1 and the like, header information such as rotation start header information and information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area are added, and the information is sent to the display control device 81. The configuration is such that a header is created. With this configuration, there is no need to store in advance the header to be transmitted in the case of a pseudo game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. Further, in such a configuration, since the created header includes information on whether or not it is a pseudo game, there is no need for a process to determine whether or not it is a pseudo game. Therefore, by simplifying the processing configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data.

The header includes information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. That is, as a configuration for making the display control device 81 understand whether or not it is a pseudo game, instead of performing calculations as in this embodiment, it is also possible to transmit 00H or 40H in the body instead of the header, for example. It is. However, in such a configuration, the number of commands to be transmitted increases by one byte, resulting in redundant commands.

The header is provided with a header identification bit, a pseudo game identification bit, and a command type storage bit, and the header is configured to fit in one byte. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the commands from becoming redundant and to allow the display control device 81 to grasp a large amount of information through the header.

In the header, the pseudo game identification bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the command type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game in a bit that would not be used in the past, and the command sent from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 becomes possible. This makes it possible to suitably suppress redundancy. In addition, by creating header information by adding pseudo game determination information, it is possible to include information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game in the header without changing the conventional header configuration. becomes. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of steps required to develop the slot machine 10.

The pseudo game flag storage area is made up of 1 byte, which is the same byte as the header, and the bits other than the 6th bit are left blank. With this configuration, when adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information, it is possible to avoid changes in the values of other bits such as the command type storage bit.

The header is created using information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area. With this configuration, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area has the function of information used to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and the function of information used when creating a header. It becomes possible to give . As a result, there is no need to provide a storage area in the RAM 106 for storing the pseudo game determination information, so it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(Fourth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that a pseudo game is performed, but a configuration may be adopted in which only the main game is performed without performing a pseudo game. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

FIG. 49 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 in this embodiment.

To the right of the first credit input switch 56 and to the left of the medal input slot 45, a production switch 67 and a selection switch 68 are provided. The effect switch 67 is operated when a press effect to be described later is executed and when a menu screen is called up in a situation where no game is being played, and the word "PUSH" is displayed on the top surface of the effect switch 67. ing. The selection switch 68 is made up of four switches: an upper switch, a lower switch, a left switch, and a right switch that specify the up, down, left, and right directions, and is used to select desired information from various information displayed on the menu screen. Be manipulated. The production switch 67 (more specifically, the production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 67) and the selection switch 68 (more specifically, the selection switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the selection switch 68) are as shown in FIG. The display controller 81 is connected to the display controller 81 .

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing reel control processing.

In step S3101, a repetition number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3. In step S3102, acceleration of the reels is started according to the value of the repetition counter. More specifically, when the value of the repetition number counter is 3, the rotation start setting table address for the left reel 32L is obtained, and when the value of the repetition number counter is 2, the rotation start setting table address for the middle reel 32M is obtained. If the value of the repetition counter is 1, the rotation start setting table address for the right reel 32R is obtained. Note that the driving control of the stepping motor is performed in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process based on the acquired rotation start setting table.

When the rotation start setting table address corresponding to the value of the repetition number counter is acquired in step S3102, the process advances to step S3103, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter. In step S3104, it is determined whether the value of the repetition number counter has become 0. If the value of the repetition number counter has not become 0, the process returns to step S3102. When the value of the repetition counter becomes 0, the process advances to step S3105, and a stop information setting process for setting stop information is performed. In the stop information setting process, stop information is created according to the result of the determination of the validity of the winning combination, and the creation result is stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In step S3106, the reel rotation number counter provided in the RAM 106 is set to 3, and in step S3107, a rotation start command is transmitted to the display control device 81. In step S3108, it is determined whether there is a reel that is being accelerated. If there is a reel that is being accelerated, the process waits until the acceleration of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. When the acceleration of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed at a predetermined rotational speed, the process advances to step S3109 and an instruction monitor display process is performed. .

In the instruction monitor display process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 52, it is determined in step S3201 whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is the notification mode, the process advances to step S3202, and it is determined whether or not the push order bell has been won. If the push order bell has been won, in step S3203, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 that can establish the bell winning is displayed on the instruction monitor, and the process ends. Further, in step S3203, an operation order command indicating the operation order to be notified is transmitted to the display control device 81. If the current game mode is not the notification mode or if the push order bell has not been won, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, in step S3110, a stop enable command is transmitted to the display control device 81. After that, stop control processing is performed in step S3111, and this processing ends.

In the stop control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53, in step S3301, it is determined whether a stop switch corresponding to a rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been issued, the system waits until a stop command is issued. If a stop command is issued, the process advances to step 3302, and a stop position determination process is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop position determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, in step S3401, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is acquired. . Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is acquired based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In step S3402, 1 is subtracted from the value of the reel rotation number counter. In step S3403, a stop command is sent to the display control device 81. Furthermore, in step S3403, the lamp (not shown) of the stop switch where the stop command has been generated is displayed to be off, thereby informing the player etc. that it is no longer possible to generate the stop command in this game. In the following step S3404, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a corresponding stopping mode in which when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stopping mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding one symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding three symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are available. Therefore, in step S3404, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Thereafter, in step S3405, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step S3406, it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter is not zero. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, that is, if a stop command has not been issued to at least one reel, stop information change processing is performed in step S3407, and then stop position determination processing is ended. When the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, when a stop command is issued to all reels, the stop position determination process is ended without performing the stop information change process.

Returning to the explanation of the stop control process, if the stop position determination process is completed, the process advances to step S3303, and it is determined whether the value of the reel rotation number counter has become 0 or not. If the value of the reel rotation number counter is not 0, the process returns to step S3301. In other words, in this slot machine 10, when the stop symbol number of the reel on which the stop command has occurred is determined, the next stop command is determined in step S3301 regardless of whether the reel on which the stop command has occurred has actually stopped. Determine whether it has occurred. Therefore, the player can continuously issue stop commands without waiting for the reels to stop. Note that the reels are stopped not in the stop control process (normal process) but in the stepping motor control process S107 of the timer interrupt process. In the stepping motor control process, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel where the stop command has occurred is equal to the stop symbol number, and if they are equal, the reel where the stop command has occurred is controlled by performing brake processing. make it stop.

If it is determined in step S3303 that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, this means that the stop symbol numbers have been determined for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number. If the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not the stop symbol numbers, the system waits until the symbol numbers of the reached symbols on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become the stop symbol numbers. When the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become the stop symbol numbers, the process advances to step S3305, and an all reel stop completion command is sent to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 recognizes that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position by receiving the all reel stop completion command. In the following step S3306, it is determined whether all stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. More specifically, it is determined whether all input signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are OFF. If the input signal from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a is ON, it means that the player is operating the corresponding stop switch, so the player remains on standby. If all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state, the process advances to step S3307, and an operation end command is sent to the display control device 81. By receiving the operation end command, the display control device 81 recognizes that all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. In step S3308, it is determined whether the instruction monitor is being displayed, and if it is being displayed, the instruction monitor is cleared in step S3309. If the instruction monitor is cleared or if the instruction monitor is not being displayed, the process ends after waiting for 100 msec in step S3310. Incidentally, the reason for waiting for 100 msec in step S3310 is to wait for the braking process to be completed in the stepping motor control process and for the swinging of the reel to converge.

Next, among the various processes performed by the display control device 81, processes related to the present invention will be described. To briefly explain the processing configuration of the display control device 81, the display control device 81, like the main control device 101, performs main processing and timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed. Timer interrupt processing in the display control device 81 is performed approximately every 10 msec. Further, the display control device 81 receives various commands such as a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 to understand the progress of the game, etc., and starts corresponding processing.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing operation end command processing.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not an operation end command has been received, and if the operation end command has not been received, the process is directly ended. On the other hand, when the operation end command is received, it means that all the stop switches 42 to 44 have not been operated, that is, the operation that generates the stop command for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been completed. do. In this case, the process advances to step S3502, and a standby timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 18,000. Note that the value of the standby timer is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the standby timer becomes 0 after approximately 180 seconds. In step S3503, it is determined whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the process is immediately terminated.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the start waiting process. The start waiting process is a process performed in the main process, and is executed based on receiving the operation end command.

In step S3601, it is determined whether the effect flag is set. If the effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S3603, and it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the production switch 67 has not been operated, the process advances to step S3604, and it is determined whether the value of the standby timer has become 0 or not. If the value of the standby timer is not 0, the process advances to step S3605, and it is determined whether the number of bets is 0 or not. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the main controller 101 sends a bet number command indicating the number of bets to the display control device 81 in the medal insertion process performed when medals are inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 are operated. Send to. The display control device 81 determines whether the bet number is 0 based on the bet number indicated by the received bet number command or the fact that the bet number command is not received. If the bet number is 0, the process returns to step S3603.

If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, menu processing is performed in step S3606.

In the menu processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, a menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S3701. In step S3702, selection menu execution processing is performed. In this slot machine 10, the following selection menus are displayed on the menu screen: game history, payout table, volume adjustment, clear game history, and menu exit. In the selection menu execution process, when the selection switch 68 is operated, the selection menu corresponding to the operation of the selection switch 68 is highlighted, and when the production switch 67 is operated, the highlighted selection menu is displayed. Perform the processing to be executed. In step S3703, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 was operated in a situation where menu termination was selected, that is, whether or not the menu termination operation was performed. If the menu termination operation has not been performed, the process advances to step S3704, and it is determined whether the number of bets is 0 or not. If the bet number is 0, the process returns to step S3702 and continues the selection menu execution process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3703 that a menu termination operation has been performed, menu termination processing is performed in step S3705. In the menu termination process, the menu screen and the like displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 are hidden, and the normal screen is displayed. In the following step S3706, the standby timer is set to 18000. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3603 of the start waiting process described above. Further, if it is determined in step S3704 that the number of bets is not 0, this means that the player performed an operation to start the next game round (bet of medals or virtual medals) while the menu screen, etc. was displayed. . In such a case, the process advances to step S3707, and the above-described menu termination process is performed. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3901 of start command waiting processing, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3604 that the value of the standby timer has become 0, the standby process is performed in step S3607.

In the waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, a customer waiting effect is started in step S3801. In the customer waiting performance, a predetermined demo movie (attract performance) is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In addition, instead of or in addition to the customer waiting effect, it may be configured to shift to the power saving mode and display on the auxiliary display section 65 that power is being saved. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the brightness of the auxiliary display section 65 is lowered and the mode is shifted to the power saving mode without executing the customer waiting effect or the power saving display. In step S3802, it is determined whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated. If the production switch 67 is not operated, it is determined in step S3803 whether the number of bets is 0 or not, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3802. If it is determined in step S3802 that the effect switch 67 has been operated, the customer waiting effect is ended in step S3804, and 18000 is set in the standby timer in step S3805. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3701 of menu processing. If it is determined in step S3803 that the number of bets is not 0, the customer waiting effect is ended in step S3806, and 18000 is set in the waiting timer in step S3807. Thereafter, the process moves to step S3901 of start command waiting processing, which will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the start waiting process, if it is determined in step S3605 that the number of bets is not 0, a start command waiting process is performed in step S3608.

In the start command waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 59, it is determined in step S3901 whether a start command has been received. Note that the start command is a command sent from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81, and is sent when it is determined that a start command has occurred in step S206 of the normal process (see FIG. 11). be done. If the start command has not been received, it is determined in step S3902 whether the number of bets is 0 or not, and if the number of bets is not 0, the process returns to step S3901. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 0, the standby timer is set to 18000 in step S3903, and the process moves to step S3603 of start waiting processing. Note that a typical example of a situation where the number of bets becomes 0 in step S3902 is when the player operates the settlement switch 59 after betting a predetermined number of medals. If it is determined in step S3901 that a start instruction command has been received, this means that the game round has started, so the process moves to in-game processing in step S3904. A detailed explanation of the in-game process will be omitted, but in the in-game process, for example, if the push order bell is won in the notification mode, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the order of operations that can make the bell win. etc.

As described above, the display control device 81 displays the menu screen on the auxiliary display section 65 when the production switch 67 is operated in a situation where no game is being played, and when the value of the standby timer becomes 0, Start waiting for customers.

In this slot machine 10, when winning the top-up lottery under the notification mode, after the operation of all stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, a press performance is performed to make the player operate a performance switch 67, and the number of top-up coins is notified. Therefore, below, a process performed by the display control device 81 when executing such a press effect will be explained.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process performed in the above-described in-game process. The performance determination process is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command has been received, and if it has not been received, the process is immediately terminated. If the lottery result command is received, the process advances to step S4002, and it is determined whether the current gaming mode is the notification mode. If the current game mode is not the notification mode, this process is immediately terminated, and if the current game mode is the notification mode, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has not been won, this process is immediately ended, and if the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S4004 and a performance execution lottery is performed. In the performance execution lottery, a success or failure determination is made based on the type of the winning rare combination and the random number acquired by the display control device 81. By the way, in the production execution lottery, if you win a watermelon, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/10, and if you win a cherry, you will win the production execution lottery with a probability of about 1/2. In step S4005, it is determined whether or not the performance execution lottery has been won. When winning the performance execution lottery, a performance flag is set in step S4006, and the present process is ended. If the performance execution lottery is not won, the process advances to step S4007, and it is determined whether the add-on command has been received. The add-on command is a command sent from the main control device 101 when winning the add-on lottery, and is sent before the lottery result command when winning the add-on lottery (see FIGS. 12 and 30). Therefore, if the add-on command has been received, it means that the player has won the add-on lottery in the current game round. In such a case, the effect flag is set in step S4006, and the present process is ended. If no additional command has been received, this process is immediately terminated. Note that, when the display control device 81 receives the top-up command, it stores the number of top-up sheets indicated by the top-up command in the top-up sheet number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 .

When all the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 sends an operation end command to the display control device 81.

When the display control device 81 receives the operation end command, it determines that the production flag is set in step S3303 of the operation end command processing shown in FIG. 55, and proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, the production switch 67 is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and a press-down display for prompting the player to operate the production switch 67 is started. In the following step S3305, a first timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1000. Note that the value of the first timer is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the first timer becomes 0 after approximately 10 seconds. When the first timer is set to 1000, the operation end command processing is ended.

In the start waiting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, if the effect flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601 and a press effect process is performed in step S3602.

In the press effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, it is determined in step S4101 whether or not the effect switch 67 has been operated, and if the effect switch 67 has not been operated, the process remains on standby. If the effect switch 67 is operated, the process advances to step S4102 and a result flag is set. Here, the result flag is a flag to start displaying the result, which notifies you of the number of additional coins if you have won the additional lottery, and informs you that no additional coins will be awarded if you have not won the additional lottery.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the result display process performed in the timer interrupt process of the display control device 81.

In step S4201, it is determined whether the result flag is set. If the result flag is set, the result flag is cleared in step S4202, and the displaying flag is set in step S4203. In step S4204, a display counter provided in the RAM of display control device 81 is set to 0, and in step S4205, an image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on auxiliary display section 65. Note that the ROM of the display control device 81 stores in advance result display image data to be executed when the player has won the additional lottery, and result display image data to be executed when the additional lottery has not been won. There is. The result display image data is composed of 201 pieces of image data associated with values from 0 to 200, and in step S4205, the result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is acquired, and the result display image data corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is acquired. The associated image data is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. When the image corresponding to the value of the display counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, this process ends.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the result flag is not set, the process advances to step S4206, and it is determined whether the displaying flag is set. If both the result flag and the displaying flag are not set, this means that the result is not being displayed, and the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the displaying flag is set, it means that the result display is being executed, so 1 is added to the value of the display counter in step S4207, and the value of the display counter is added in step S4208. An image corresponding to the image is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In step S4209, it is determined whether the value of the display counter has reached 200 or not, and if the value of the display counter has not reached 200, this process is directly terminated. When the value of the display counter reaches 200, it means that the final image data of the result display image data has been displayed, that is, the result display has been executed to the end, so in step S4210, the displaying flag is cleared and , a completion flag is set in step S4211. In step S4212, a second timer provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 300. Note that the value of the second timer is decremented by 1 in the timer interrupt process. Since timer interrupt processing is performed approximately every 10 msec, the value of the second timer becomes 0 after approximately 3 seconds. When the second timer is set to 300, the result display process ends.

As described above, when the result flag is set in the press effect processing, the result display processing is started in the timer interrupt processing approximately every 10 msec, and the result display is executed for approximately 2 seconds. Note that when the result display is executed to the end, the final image data of the result display image data continues to be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until the transition is made to any of the above-mentioned menu processing, standby processing, and start command waiting processing. (See Figure 56).

Returning to the explanation of the press effect processing, in step S4103, it is determined whether the value of the first timer has become 0, and if the value of the first timer has not become 0, the value of the first timer is 0. Wait until . When the value of the first timer becomes 0, it means that about 10 seconds have passed since the start of the press display. In this case, the process advances to step S4104, and it is determined whether the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is set, it means that the result display has been executed to the end, so the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and the main processing is continued. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4104 that the completion flag is not set, this means that the result display is in progress, so the process advances to step S4107 and waits until the value of the second timer becomes 0. More specifically, in step S4107, the process waits until the value of the display counter becomes 20 and the value of the second timer becomes 0. If the value of the second timer becomes 0, the completion flag is cleared in step S4105, and the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, and the process ends.

Here, the subsequent flow when the press-down display is performed will be specifically explained.

When the press-down display is performed, the press-down display continues on the auxiliary display section 65 until the production switch 67 is operated. Then, when the effect switch 67 is operated in a situation where the press-down display is being performed, the result display is started. It takes about 2 seconds to display the results to the end.

Here, if the production switch 67 is operated before approximately 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the press display, the result display will be finished until approximately 10 seconds have elapsed after the start of the press display. can be executed up to. Therefore, in such a case, since the completion flag is also set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, it is necessary to immediately end the press effect process and move to step S3603 of the start waiting process. Become. At this time, the value of the second timer is not referenced. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated before approximately 8 seconds have elapsed since the start of the press-down display, the menu screen will be displayed approximately 10 seconds after the start of the press-down display. The operation of the production switch 67 (hereinafter also referred to as "menu start operation") becomes effective.

If the effect switch 67 is operated between about 8 seconds and about 10 seconds after starting the press-down display, the timing will be about 10 seconds after the start of the press-down display in the middle of the result display. Therefore, in such a case, the completion flag is not set at the timing when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and the process moves to step S3603 of the start waiting process after the value of the second timer becomes 0. I will do it. In other words, if the production switch 67 is operated between about 8 seconds and about 10 seconds after the start of the press display, the production switch 67 will be operated after 3 seconds have elapsed since the result display was executed to the end. The menu start operation becomes effective approximately 5 seconds after the operation.

If the production switch 67 is operated after approximately 10 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the press display, the completion flag will not be set at the timing when the first timer value becomes 0 (result display). (has not yet started), the process moves to step S3603 of the start waiting process after the result display is executed to the end and the value of the second timer reaches 0. In other words, if the effect switch 67 is operated after approximately 10 seconds or more have elapsed since the start of the press-down display, the effect switch 67 is operated after 3 seconds have elapsed since the result display has been executed to the end. After approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, the menu start operation becomes effective.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In conventional slot machines, menu processing is not executed after a game in which an auxiliary effect that proceeds in response to the operation of a effect switch, such as the press effect described above, is executed, that is, the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated. There was something. In such a configuration, if a menu screen is to be displayed, it is necessary to continue playing the game until a game in which the press effect is not executed occurs, which is a source of frustration for the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which menu processing is executed even after the game in which the press effect has been executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of displaying the menu screen at the timing desired by the player, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

When the press display is started, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the first timer becomes 0, and the menu starts when the value of the second timer becomes 0 instead of the first timer. The configuration is such that there are cases in which the operation is valid. With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective depending on the start timing of result display, that is, the operation timing of the production switch 67. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will feel frustrated that the menu screen is not displayed even if the player operates the effect switch 67.

Certainly, a configuration in which the menu start operation is enabled after the game in which the press effect is executed is also possible, for example, a configuration in which the menu start operation is enabled after a certain period of time, such as 3 seconds, has elapsed after the result display has been executed to the end. It is. However, with such a configuration, it is conceivable that the player may feel irritated by having to wait for three seconds. In order to eliminate such concerns, it is possible to configure a configuration in which the menu start operation becomes effective immediately when the result display is executed to the end. However, in such a configuration, the menu may be activated at a timing that the player does not intend. A new problem arises in that there is an opportunity to display the screen. When the result display has been executed to the end, if the player operates the performance switch 67 again in the expectation of further development of a so-called reversal performance, the display content on the auxiliary display section 65 switches from the press performance to the menu screen. This is because

On the other hand, in this slot machine 10 where the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, unless the production switch 67 is operated approximately 8 seconds after the start of the press display, the result will be A grace period can be provided between when the display is executed to the end and when the menu start operation becomes effective. The existence of such a grace period makes it possible to reduce the chances of the menu screen being displayed at a timing not intended by the player. This may lead to irritation of the player who has to wait for the grace period, but the length of the grace period changes depending on the timing of operation of the production switch 67. Therefore, it is possible to have the player operate the production switch 67 while making the player feel inquisitive, wondering if the menu start operation is already valid this time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce player's irritation.

As a result of the above, the present slot machine 10 can suitably eliminate each of the above-mentioned concerns, and reduce the chance that the player will feel frustrated that the menu screen is not displayed even after operating the production switch 67. It becomes possible to do so.

When the value of the first timer becomes 0 and a completion flag indicating that the result display has been executed to the end is set, the menu start operation is enabled. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid the menu start operation becoming valid during the display of results.

The configuration is such that the value of the first timer is set to 1000. When the press-down display is started, the time required from the time the player recognizes the press-down display until the player actually operates the production switch 67 is 5 seconds, even if the player operates it after praying that the number of additional coins will be announced. It is assumed that it is generally within the following range. Since it takes about 2 seconds to display the results to the end, by setting the first timer value to 1000, there is a chance that the menu screen will be displayed at a timing that the player did not intend. This makes it possible to reduce the In addition, in such a configuration, if the effect switch 67 is operated before approximately 8 seconds have elapsed since the press-down display has started, the menu start operation will become effective after approximately 10 seconds have elapsed. It is possible to encourage users to operate the button while reducing the chance of a delay between the press display and the result display.

The configuration is such that the value of the second timer is set to 300. If the result display has not been executed to the end after approximately 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the push-down display, it is possible that the player has not operated the production switch 67 due to, for example, leaving the player's seat. In such a case, by configuring the menu start operation to become effective after approximately 3 seconds have elapsed after the results have been displayed to the end, there is no chance of the menu screen being displayed at a timing that the player did not intend. It becomes possible to reduce the amount.

(Fifth embodiment)

In the first embodiment, the notification mode ends based on the number of net additions, but the notification mode may end based on the number of games. Therefore, such a configuration will be explained in detail below. Note that since the basic configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, only the differences will be described below.

First, the processing performed by the main control device 101 will be explained.

The processing performed by the main controller 101 in the normal section is the same as in the first embodiment. Therefore, in the normal section, if you win any winning combination in the 3-card game, it means that you have won the lottery to move to the advantageous section. For example, in the case of "Setting 3", there is a probability of about 1/2 of winning some combination, and a probability of about 1/6.4 of winning. Therefore, if three cards are played in the normal section, the game will be completed in approximately one game. When the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the game starts from the chance mode and 700 is set as the number of transition games (see FIG. 26).

The processing performed by the main control device 101 in the chance mode is different from the first embodiment in the game section processing.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing game section processing in chance mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S4301, the termination determination process described in the first embodiment is performed (see FIG. 29).

In step S4302, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S4301, so a section command is sent in step S4311. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, the process advances to step S4303, and it is determined whether or not the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a three-copy game, 1 is added to the value of the mode game counter in step S4304, and it is determined in step S4305 whether or not a transition flag is set. If the transition flag is set, it means that the lottery to transition to the notification mode has been won, so the transition flag is cleared in step S4306, and the transition flag is stored in the section information storage area 106d in step S4308. Change the current game mode flag to the notification flag. In the following step S4309, a transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, a mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S4311, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S4305 that the transition flag is not set, it means that the lottery for transition to the notification mode was not won. In such a case, the process advances to step S4307, and it is determined whether the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter. If the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process ends after transmitting the section command in step S4311. On the other hand, if the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, the game mode flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the notification flag in step S4308. In the following step S4309, a transition game number counter is set to 50, and in step S4310, a mode game number counter is set to 0. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S4311, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S4303 that the current game is a 2-coin game instead of a 3-coin game, a section command is sent in step S4311 without updating the mode game counter, etc., and the process ends. do.

Next, processing in the advantageous section notification mode will be explained.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the section lottery process in the notification mode. The section lottery process is a process that is performed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination in the lottery process (see step S309, FIG. 12), and is performed at the start stage of the game.

In step S4401, it is determined whether the current game is a 3-coin game. If it is a 3-card game, the process advances to step S4402, and it is determined whether or not the rare combination has been won. If the rare combination has been won, the process advances to step S4403, and an additional lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the value of the transition game number counter. In the additional lottery, the success or failure is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the success or failure of the winning combination. By the way, in the add-on lottery, for example, in the case of setting 3, if you win a watermelon, the probability is about 1/5 that you will win one of 50, 100, or 300 add-on games, and if you win a cherry, the probability is about 1/3. The probability is that you will win 50 additional games. In step S4404, it is determined whether or not the player has won the additional lottery. If the bonus lottery is won, the process advances to step S4405, and a post-notification lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the number of bonus games in a game subsequent to the game. In the post-notification lottery, the winning flag is determined based on the set winning flag and the random number obtained when determining the winning combination. If the later notification lottery is not won, an add-on flag is set in step S4407, and an add-on command is transmitted in step S4408. Here, the add-on command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that the add-on lottery has been won and the number of add-on games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. In step S4409, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transfer game number counter. After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if the post-notification lottery is won, the post-notification command is transmitted in step S4410 without setting the additional flag. Here, the post-notification command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to make it understand that the post-notification lottery has been won and the number of additional games to be added to the value of the transition game number counter. . In step S4409, a value corresponding to the lottery result of the additional lottery is added to the value of the transfer game number counter. After that, this process ends. If the player does not win the additional lottery, the process ends immediately. Further, if the current game is a two-card game instead of a three-card game, or if the rare combination is not won, the process is ended without performing the additional lottery.

As described above, when winning the add-on lottery, the add-on command or the post-notification command is transmitted to the display control device 81. When the add-on flag is set and the add-on command is transmitted, the number of add-on games is notified in the pseudo game as described in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31). Furthermore, if a post-notification command is sent without setting an additional command, the number of additional games will be notified in a revival performance to be described later. Note that if the pseudo-game lottery is won in a situation where the post-notification command is transmitted (see FIG. 16), the number of additional games will be notified not as a pseudo-game but as a revival effect.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing game section processing in the notification mode. The game section process is a process performed after the end of the medal payout process (step S214, see FIG. 11), and is performed at the end stage of the game.

In step S4501, the end determination process described in the first embodiment is performed, and in step S4502, it is determined whether the current gaming section is an advantageous section. If it is determined that the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section, this means that an advantageous section end process has been performed in the end determination process of step S4501, so a section command is sent in step S4508. Afterwards, this process ends.

If the current game section is an advantageous section, 1 is added to the value of the mode game number counter in step S4503, and the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter in step S4504. Determine whether or not. If the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter, advantageous section end processing shown in steps S4505 to S4507 is performed, and a section command is transmitted in step S4508, and this processing ends. . In the advantageous section end process, the game section flag stored in the section information storage area 106d is changed to the normal flag in step S4505, and the section display 66 is turned off in step S4506. In step S4507, initialization processing is executed in response to the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization process, a process is executed to initialize information related to the instruction function (for example, a section game number counter value, etc.) stored in the section information storage area 106d.

If it is determined in step S4504 that the value of the mode game number counter does not match the value of the transition game number counter, the process advances to step S4509, and it is determined whether the completion flag is set. If the completion flag is not set, it is determined in step S4510 whether the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50. The remaining number of games in the notification mode is derived by subtracting the value of the mode game number counter from the value of the transition game number counter. If the remaining number of games in the notification mode is greater than 50, the process advances to step S4511, and it is determined whether the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200. If the number of remaining games in the notification mode is greater than 50 and the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, a completion flag is set in step S4512, and 1500 is set in the transition game number counter in step S4513. When 1,500 games are played in the advantageous section and when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous section reaches 2400, the advantageous section ends regardless of the game mode at that time. Therefore, if the transition game number counter is set to 1500 in a situation where the value of the difference number counter is greater than 2200, the advantageous section and notification mode will end when the difference number of medals in the advantageous section reaches 2400. That will happen. In step S4514, a completion command is sent to the display control device 81, indicating that it has been determined that the process will end with a difference of 2400 sheets. After that, the section command is transmitted in step S4508, and the process ends.

When it is determined that the completion flag is set in step S4509, when it is determined that the number of remaining games in the notification mode is 50 or less in step S4510, and when the value of the difference number counter is determined to be 2200 or less in step S4511. If it is determined that this is the case, the section command is sent in step S4508, and then the process ends.

This embodiment is characterized by the display effect on the auxiliary display section 65 when the mode is changed from the notification mode (advantageous section) to the chance mode (advantageous section) via the normal section. Therefore, various processes performed by the display control device 81 will be explained below in accordance with the flow of the game.

The process performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from the chance mode to the notification mode will be described.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing section command processing in the notification mode. The section command process is a process that is started when a section command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is started after the game ends.

In step S4601, it is determined whether the current game is a transition game to the notification mode. The RAM of the display control device 81 is provided with a game section storage area that stores information about the game section indicated by the section command. The game section storage area is composed of a first area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the current game, and a second area that stores information indicated by the section command received in the previous game. In step S4601, if information indicating chance mode is stored in the second area and information indicating notification mode is stored in the first area, it is determined that the current game is a transition game to notification mode. do. In step S4602, a start flag is set. In step S4603, a display game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 50, and in step S4604, a post-notification game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 0. Thereafter, transition notification processing is performed in step S4605, and the present processing ends. By performing the transition notification process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode will start from the next game and that the number of games that can be played under the notification mode is 50 games, as shown in FIG. 73(a). It will be displayed.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing start command processing in notification mode. If the main control device 101 determines that a start command has been generated (step S206, see FIG. 11), it transmits the start command to the display control device 81. The start command process is a process that is started when a start command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is started when the game starts.

In step S4701, it is determined whether the start flag is set. If the start flag is set, it means that the current game is the first game in the notification mode, so the start flag is cleared in step S4702, and the value of the display game number counter is cleared in step S4703. is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the present process ends. By performing this process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a scene where the young character is taking a walk on the road and that there are 50 games remaining in the notification mode, as shown in FIG. 73(b). be done. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the control for notifying the order of operations when the push order bell is won is performed in the lottery result command process that is activated when the lottery result command is received (step S310, FIG. 12 reference).

Next, a description will be given of the processing that the display control device 81 performs when the completion command is not received in the notification mode.

In the section command processing that is started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 and a completion command is received. Determine whether or not. If the completion command has not been received, 1 is subtracted from the value of the displayed game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined in step S4611 whether the value of the displayed game number counter has become 1. If the value of the displayed game number counter is not 1, it is determined in step S4613 whether the value of the displayed game number counter has become 0, and if the value of the displayed game number counter is not 0, In this case, the process ends immediately.

If it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the displayed game number counter has become 1, this means that the next game will be the last game in the notification mode, at least for the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, an end flag is set in step S4612, and the process ends.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S4613 that the value of the displayed game number counter has become 0, it means that the player has won the post-notification lottery in any of the games until the value of the displayed game number counter becomes 0. do. This is because, when the final game in the notification mode is finished, the main control device 101 transmits a section command indicating that the mode is a normal section instead of a section command indicating that the mode is a notification mode (see FIG. 65). In such a case, a revival flag is set in step S4614, and the value of the post-notification game number counter is set in the display game number counter in step S4615. Note that, when a post-notification command indicating that the post-notification lottery has been won is received, the number of additional games indicated by the post-notification command is added to the post-notification game number counter. Thereafter, in step S4616, the post-notification game number counter is set to 0, and the process ends.

In the start command processing that is activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S4701 that the start flag is not set, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not the end flag is set. Determine. If the end flag is not set, the process advances to step S4707, and it is determined whether the restoration flag is set. If the revival flag is not set, the process advances to step S4710, and it is determined whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is not set, the value of the display game counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S4712, and the process ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the number of remaining games subtracted by 1 each time a game is played.

If it is determined in step S4704 that the end flag is set, this means that the current game is the last game in the notification mode, at least for the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, the end flag is cleared in step S4705, and an end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S4706, and this processing ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 shows that the notification mode has ended and that the number of medals acquired at the present time (e.g., 800), that is, the difference from the end of the previous game. The number of sheets and is displayed. Note that the lottery result command will be received after receiving the start command, but if a lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won is received, in addition to displaying the end screen, the bell prize will be established. The order of possible operations is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. For example, when receiving a lottery result command indicating that the middle left and right bells have been won, as shown in FIG. 73(d), in addition to ending the notification mode and the current number of medals acquired The operation order “213” is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65.

If it is determined in step S4707 that the revival flag is set, it means that the player has won the post-notification lottery, that is, there is an unannounced number of additional games. In such a case, the revival flag is cleared in step S4708, and a revival effect process is performed in step S4709, and the present process ends. By performing the revival effect processing, the auxiliary display section 65 shows that the notification mode continues without ending and the number of additional games won in the later notification lottery (for example, 50 games), as shown in FIG. 73(e). ) are displayed, and then the normal screen under the notification mode shown in FIG. 73(b) is displayed.

As described above, if a completion command is not received under the notification mode, the end screen is displayed at the start of the game when the number of remaining games on the auxiliary display section 65 becomes 0. If the player wins the post-notification lottery, a revival effect is performed at the start of the next game after displaying the end screen to notify the continuation of the notification mode.

Next, a process performed by the display control device 81 when a completion command is received in the notification mode will be described.

In the section command processing that is started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, if it is determined in step S4601 that the current game is not a transition game to the notification mode, the process advances to step S4606 and a completion command is received. Determine whether or not. When a completion command is received, it means that it has been determined that the process will end with a difference of 2400 sheets. In such a case, an ending flag is set in step S4607, and 1500 is set in the display game counter in step S4608. Thereafter, ending notification processing is performed in step S4609, and the present processing ends. By performing the ending notification process, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the ending video will start from the next game.

In the section command processing in the game after receiving the completion command, 1 is subtracted from the value of the display game number counter in step S4610, and it is determined in step S4611 whether the value of the display game number counter has become 1. do. As described above, in the section command processing when the completion command is received, the display game number counter is set to 1500 in step S4608. Therefore, in the section command processing in the game after receiving the completion command, it is determined in step S4611 that the value of the display game number counter is not 1. For the same reason, in step S4613 proceeding from step S4611, it is determined that the value of the displayed game number counter is not 0, and this processing is ended.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, it is determined in step S4710 whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is set, the process is ended after the ending execution process is performed in step S4711. In the ending execution process, a process of displaying a predetermined ending video on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed.

As described above, when it is determined that the notification mode ends when the difference number of sheets is 2400, a predetermined ending video is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the next game until the notification mode and advantageous section end.

The process performed by the display control device 81 when transitioning from the notification mode to the normal section will be described.

In the section command process started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether the current game is a transition game to the normal section. More specifically, it is determined whether information indicating the notification mode is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and information indicating the normal section is stored in the first area. If the current game is a transition game to the normal section, the process advances to step S4802, and a continuous game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. After that, this process ends. If the current game is not a transition game to the normal section, 1 is added to the value of the continuous game number counter in step S4803, and the process ends.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 69, it is determined in step S4901 whether the ending flag is set. When the ending flag is set, it means that a predetermined ending video is displayed in the notification mode. In such a case, the ending flag is cleared in step S4902, and a process of displaying an end screen on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed in step S4903. Thereafter, a continuation flag is set in step S4904, and the process ends. By performing the above processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays that the notification mode ends and the number of medals acquired at the time of ending the notification mode.

If it is determined in step S4901 that the ending flag is not set, the process advances to step S4905, and it is determined whether the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is not set, the continuation flag is set in step S4906, and then the process advances to step S4907; if the continuation flag is set, the process directly advances to step S4907. In step S4907, processing is performed to continue displaying the end screen. After that, this process ends. Note that in step S4907, the process of changing and displaying the number of acquired medals is not performed.

As described above, when the notification mode ends when the number of sheets differs by 2400, the end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the first game of the normal section until the end of the normal section. When the notification mode ends when the number of transition games is used up, the end screen of the notification mode is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 from the last game in the notification mode until the end of the normal section.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing lottery result command processing in the normal section. The lottery result command process is a process that is activated when a lottery result command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is activated at the start stage of the game.

In step S5001, it is determined whether or not any winning combination has been won in the current game. If you win any winning combination in the current game, this means that you have won the lottery to shift to chance mode, that is, you will shift to chance mode from the next game, so this process ends as is. On the other hand, if no winning combination has been won in the current game, that is, if the normal section continues in the next game, the process advances to step S5002, and it is determined whether the value of the number of continued games counter is smaller than 6. . If the value of the continuous game number counter is smaller than 6, a suggested gem selection lottery is performed in step S5003. In the suggested jewel selection lottery, a selection lottery is performed based on the setting state of the slot machine 10 and the random numbers acquired by the display control device 81. By the way, in the suggestion jewel selection lottery, in the case of setting 1 or setting 2, blue jewels are selected 40% of the time, yellow jewels are selected 30% of the time, green jewels are selected 20% of the time, and 10% of the time the blue jewels are selected. Select red jewels at a rate of %. For setting 3 or setting 4, 20% of the time blue jewels are selected, 30% of the time yellow jewels are selected, 30% of the time green jewels are selected, and 20% of the time red jewels are selected. do. For setting 5 or setting 6, 10% of the time blue jewels are selected, 20% of the time yellow jewels are selected, 30% of the time green jewels are selected, and 40% of the time red jewels are selected. do. Note that the selection rate may be configured to be different for each setting of settings 1 to 6. In step S5004, processing is performed to display the selection results of the suggested jewel selection lottery on the auxiliary display section 65. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S5002 that the value of the number of consecutive games counter is 6 or more, the process advances to step S5005, and a process of displaying the confirmed jewel in which the setting state of the slot machine 10 is written on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed. conduct. After that, this process ends. For example, when processing is performed to display confirmed orbs in the slot machine 10 with setting 6, the end screen and the orb marked 6 are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, as shown in FIG. 73(f). Is displayed.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the all reel stop completion command processing in the normal section. The all reel stop completion command process is a process that is activated when an all reel stop completion command transmitted from the main control device 101 is received, and is activated at the end stage of the game.

In the all reel stop completion command process, the suggested or confirmed jewel displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5101, and the process ends.

As mentioned above, in the normal section, if you do not shift to chance mode, the suggestion gem will be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until all reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop in the 1st to 5th games, and from the 6th game onwards. If so, the confirmed jewel is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. Here, the probability of not shifting to chance mode, that is, the probability of failure occurring, is approximately 1/6.4. Therefore, a player who wants to guess the setting based on the appearance status of suggested gems or a player who wants to understand the setting status from the confirmed gem needs to play games so that the number of games played in the normal section increases.

Next, a description will be given of the processing that the display control device 81 performs when transitioning from the normal section to the chance mode.

In the section command processing started after the end of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 68, it is determined in step S4801 whether or not the current game is a transition game to chance mode. More specifically, it is determined whether information indicating the normal section is stored in the second area of the game section storage area and information indicating the chance mode is stored in the first area. If the current game is a transition game to the chance mode, the process advances to step S4802, and a continuous game number counter provided in the RAM of the display control device 81 is set to 1. After that, this process ends. If the current game is not a transition game to the chance mode, 1 is added to the value of the continuous game number counter in step S4803, and the process ends.

In the start command process activated at the start of the game, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 72, it is determined in step S5201 whether a continuation flag is set. When the continuation flag is set, it means that the end screen is being displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. In such a case, the continuation flag is cleared in step S5202, and the end screen displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is hidden in step S5203. Thereafter, in step S5204, the value of the continuous game number counter is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the present process ends. By performing such processing, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the young character walking in the distance on the road and the number of games in the chance mode, as shown in FIG. 73(g).

If it is determined in step S5201 that the continuation flag is not set, a process is performed to display the value of the continuation game number counter on the auxiliary display section 65 in step S5205, and this process ends. By performing such processing, the number of games is displayed incremented by 1 each time a game is played on the auxiliary display section 65.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

When the notification mode ends when the difference number of sheets reaches 2400, the end screen is displayed in the next game after the game in which the difference number reaches 2400, that is, the first game of the normal section, and the notification mode ends when the number of transition games is exhausted. In this case, the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode. In this way, by varying the games in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. becomes.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends when the difference in number of sheets reaches 2400, the end screen is displayed in the game following the game in which the difference in number of sheets reaches 2400. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen across multiple games in a situation where the notification mode has not ended. It is certainly possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the next game when the difference in number of sheets is 2394 or more. However, in the case of such a configuration, in the case where the push order bell is not won, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated in the notified operation order despite winning the push order bell, etc. Even though the end screen is displayed, an event occurs in which the difference number of sheets does not reach 2400 and the notification mode does not end. If the above event occurs, the end screen will continue to be displayed until the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends.

When the remaining number of games is greater than 50 and the difference number is greater than 2200, the value of the transition game number counter is changed so that the difference number reaches 2400 and the notification mode ends. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game from various viewpoints.

First, if the advantageous section is simply configured to end when the differential number of sheets reaches 2400, some players may think that if the advantageous section (notification mode) actually reaches the differential number of 2400 sheets and ends, the upper limit Some players think that they could have won even more medals if there was no limit on the number of medals, and this reduces their desire to play. This is because it is rare for the difference in the number of coins to reach 2400 at the timing when the number of remaining games reaches 0. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference number of coins is greater than 2200, the player is instructed to play games in the notification mode with the aim of reaching the difference number of coins 2200. It becomes possible to perform the following. In addition, the expected increase in medals per game in notification mode is approximately 3.5 medals, so if the number of remaining games is 57 or less and the difference in number of medals is greater than 2200, you can win the additional lottery. It becomes equal to that. This is because the expected value of the number of games required to increase the number of medals by 200 is 58. As a result of the above, even in the case of a configuration in which an upper limit is set on the number of differential coins in advantageous sections, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the player's desire to play, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing. It becomes possible.

Next, when ending the notification mode with the difference in the number of sheets as a condition, the end time of the notification mode will vary depending on the lottery result of the winning combination, etc., as described above. For this reason, in a configuration in which the condition for ending the notification mode is defined by the number of games, it is difficult to execute the ending effect over a plurality of games. On the other hand, in this slot machine 10, which changes the value of the transition game number counter when the number of remaining games is greater than 50 and the difference number of coins is greater than 2200, it is possible to notify in advance that the notification mode will end when the difference number reaches 2400. It can be confirmed. Therefore, the number of games from when the value of the transition game number counter is changed until the difference number reaches 2400 can be secured as the number of games for displaying the ending video. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the ending effect in a suitable manner. In addition, it is possible to inform the player that the advantageous section can be completed through the ending performance, and it is also possible to make the player play the game while feeling a sense of superiority until the difference in number of sheets actually reaches 2400. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the ending effect is executed, the end screen is displayed in the first game of the normal section, so the player can enjoy the ending effect until the next game starts, and can also enjoy the ending effect while immersing himself in the afterglow. You can play the next game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends after the number of transition games is exhausted, the configuration is such that an end screen is displayed in the last game of the notification mode. When the notification mode ends when the number of transition games is exhausted, the final game in the notification mode will not be shifted due to the lottery result of the winning combination or the like. Therefore, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen across multiple games even though the notification mode has not ended.

In the case of winning the post-notification lottery, a revival effect is performed in the next game after displaying the end screen, and the number of additional games is notified. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start lever 41 in order to generate a command to start the next game while expecting the notification mode to continue, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to aim for.

Here, let us consider a case where the end screen is displayed in the next game after the end of the informing mode, similar to the case where the informing mode ends when the number of sheets differs by 2400. In such a configuration, since the game section of the game that displayed the end screen is already the normal section, even if a rare combination is won in the game, an additional lottery will not be held, and the event that the notification mode will be restored is prevented. (See FIGS. 25 and 26). On the other hand, in this slot machine 10 where the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, since the game is in the notification mode, if you win a rare combination, you can carry out an additional lottery and a post-notification lottery to perform a revival effect. . Therefore, it becomes possible to carry out a revival effect in a suitable manner, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

When the notification mode ends after the number of transition games is exhausted, the configuration is such that an end screen is displayed at the start of the last game in the notification mode. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the end screen that has been prepared to be wasted. Then, after the end screen is displayed to the player in the final game of the notification mode, it is possible to notify that the notification mode will continue by means of a revival effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction that the notification mode continues. It is certainly possible to display the end screen after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped to perform a revival effect. However, it is common for players to play games continuously, and in the notification mode where virtual medals are stored and stored, there is no need to directly insert medals, so the game interval is generally shorter. It is true. For this reason, if the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, there is a possibility that the player will start the next game without checking the end screen, and the revival effect may cause the player to start the next game without checking the end screen. Events such as realizing that the previous game was the last game in the notification mode may occur. This not only leads to the end screen that has been prepared so painstakingly rendered useless, but also leads to a loss of satisfaction with the continuation of the notification mode. On the other hand, the present slot machine 10 that displays the end screen at the start of the final game can suitably eliminate each of the above concerns.

In the first game of the normal section, the end screen was configured to be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to let the player play the first game in the normal section while immersing himself in the afterglow of the notification mode. In addition, in such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed across two games, it is determined that it is not an advantageous period and that a revival effect will not be performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide new gameplay using the conventionally prepared end screen, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which a lottery for transition to the notification mode is not performed in the normal section, a player may decide to play in the chance mode rather than in the normal section, and enter the normal section. There were concerns that people would avoid playing the slot machines they were staying at. Therefore, in the present slot machine 10, when the end screen is displayed over two games, it is determined that it is not an advantageous period and that no revival effect will be performed. In such a configuration, when the end screen is displayed in the final game of the notification mode, the player who played the game under the notification mode issues a command to start the next game in the hope that a revival effect will occur. That will happen. Therefore, if the advantageous period has ended, it becomes possible for the player who played the game under the notification mode to play the first game of the normal period. Even if the player ends the game at such timing, the end screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Therefore, it is possible to make another player different from the above-mentioned player start playing the second game in the normal section while expecting that a revival effect will occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from avoiding playing a game at the slot machine 10 staying in the normal section, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the slot machine 10.

The end screen is continuously displayed until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects performed in the normal section, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

When a winning combination is won in a 3-card game, the game shifts from the normal section to the chance mode, and the system is configured so that the chance of winning is only about 1 in 6.4. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the probability of shifting to chance mode is higher than the probability of not shifting, it is possible to reduce the number of games that stay in the normal section. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the end screen is displayed continuously for a long period of time, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player ends the game while the end screen is displayed.

As described above, even if the configuration is such that the probability of transitioning to chance mode is higher than the probability of not transitioning, an event may occur in which the vehicle stays in the normal zone without transitioning from the normal zone to chance mode. If the end screen is continuously displayed for a long period of time, there is a concern that the game in the normal section will become monotonous. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is configured to display the suggested jewel or the confirmed jewel if the mode does not shift from the normal section to the chance mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the user think of making a setting guess based on the appearance status of the suggested gem, or to make the user think that the normal section should continue until the confirmed gem is displayed. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent players from avoiding playing games in the slot machine 10 while staying in the normal section, but also to prevent the games in the normal section from becoming monotonous. becomes possible.

When all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, the displayed suggested or confirmed jewel is hidden. With this configuration, it is possible to configure the suggested orbs and the confirmed orbs without actually playing the game, and it is possible to have a player who wants to guess the settings play the game in the normal section. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the slot machine 10 from decreasing due to the normal section.

From the 6th game onwards in the normal section, a confirmed jewel in which the setting status of the slot machine 10 is written is displayed. With this configuration, even if the game does not shift from the normal section to the chance mode, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his or her desire to play. This is because if the setting status can be ascertained through the confirmed jewels, it will be a major factor in determining whether or not to continue playing the game.

When the game shifts to chance mode, the number of games played in chance mode is displayed. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the maximum number of games required before transitioning to the notification mode, the number of remaining games that can be played in the advantageous section, etc., and it becomes possible to increase the player's desire to play. . On the other hand, since the number of games played in the normal section is unrelated to the number of games played in the advantageous section and chance mode, if the above number of games is displayed after the end of the advantageous section, for example, the number of games played in the "-G" As such, you will have to display the number of games that will not be updated until you switch to chance mode. This leads to the player thinking that playing in the normal section is meaningless and reducing his or her desire to play. However, in a configuration such as the present slot machine 10 in which the end screen is continuously displayed for each game in the normal section, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the display of the number of games in the chance mode, which reduces the visual discomfort. becomes possible. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

When displaying the end screen, it is configured to display the fact that the notification mode ends and the current number of medals acquired. When the end screen is continuously displayed, that is, when the end screen is displayed in the normal section, the number of acquired medals being displayed is not changed. With this configuration, even if the end screen is displayed in the normal section, it is possible to accurately notify the number of medals won by the player in the advantageous section. Further, since there is no need for processing to update the number of acquired medals displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the content described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(1) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the main game is started as is, but all the reels 32L , 32M, and 32R may be slowed down for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds), then returned to a steady rotation speed, and then the main game may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the pseudo game will end through a change in the rotational speed of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the main game continues as it is, but all the reels 32L , 32M, and 32R may be pseudo-stopped before proceeding to the main game, or one or two reels may be pseudo-stopped before proceeding to the main game.

In the case of a configuration in which one or two reels are pseudo-stopped and then the main game is started, the pseudo-game is It becomes possible to quickly transition from the game to the main game. In addition, in such a configuration, the transition to the main game can be notified by the reels that have stopped pseudo-stopping starting to rotate again, so the player cannot tell whether it is a pseudo-game or a real game. It is possible to avoid this.

(3) In the first embodiment, if the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is ended after all rotating reels are pseudo-stopped. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the pseudo game is ended without pseudo-stopping all of the rotating reels. In the case of such a configuration, it is only necessary to perform a process of starting rotation of only the reels that have been pseudo-stopped, so it is possible to quickly transition from the pseudo-game to the main game. In addition, in such a configuration, the transition to the main game can be notified by the reels that have stopped pseudo-stopping starting to rotate again, so the player cannot tell whether it is a pseudo-game or a real game. It is possible to avoid this.

(4) In the first embodiment, when the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the payment switch 59, the same processing as when a pseudo-stop command is generated is performed. It may be configured to perform different processing than when a command is issued. In the case of such a configuration, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to pseudo-stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and the settlement switch 59 is operated to pseudo-stop each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It is possible to change the stopping result of the symbol depending on the case. As a result, it becomes possible to make the difference between the operation of the payment switch 59 and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 clear, and it becomes possible for the player to select which one to operate.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are immediately brought to a pseudo stop at the timing when the settlement switch 59 is operated, regardless of the stop position of the symbols. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause an event such as, for example, a symbol stopping at a position shifted by 1/2 symbol from the middle line L2.

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped so that the combination of "Red 7" symbols does not stop on the middle line L2 even if the winning lottery is won. let

For example, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped at a position shifted by 1/2 symbol from the stop position when the pseudo-stop command is generated.

(5) In the first embodiment, when the settlement switch 59 is operated in a pseudo game, it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed, but this is not limited to the operation of the settlement switch 59, and the game Any operation that does not affect the progress of the game after the start of the game is sufficient. Therefore, it may be configured to determine that a cancel operation has been performed when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, or it may be configured that it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed when the second credit input switch 57 is operated. . A configuration may also be adopted in which it is determined that a cancel operation has been performed when the third credit input switch 58 is operated.

Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration of determining whether a cancel operation has been performed, a configuration may be adopted in which the pseudo game is ended when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without a pseudo stop command being generated.

(6) In the first embodiment, when the payment switch 59 is operated in a situation where at least one reel has pseudo-stopped, all rotating reels are pseudo-stopped. It is also possible to have a configuration in which one of them is pseudo-stopped. In such a configuration, if one reel is in a pseudo-stop, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch 59 twice in order to make all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R pseudo-stop.

(7) In the first embodiment, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the pseudo game is immediately ended and at least one reel is pseudo stopped. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation, all the rotating reels are pseudo-stopped, but the process performed when ending the pseudo-game is different depending on the number of reels that are pseudo-stopped or the number of pseudo-stop commands generated. Good to have.

For example, if the settlement switch 59 is operated while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, one reel will be pseudo-stopped while the other two reels will not be pseudo-stopped and a pseudo-game will be played. Terminate it. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where one reel is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo game is ended after the other two reels are pseudo-stopped. When a settlement switch 59 is operated in a situation where two reels are pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is ended without pseudo-stopping the other reel.

(8) In the first embodiment, the rotation speed of the reels in the pseudo game and the rotation speed of the reels in the main game are equal, but the rotation speed of the reels in the pseudo game and the reel rotation speed in the main game are the same. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the rotational speeds of and the rotational speeds are different.

(9) In the first embodiment, the stop information setting process is performed after the rotation start process, but the stop information setting process is performed before determining whether a pseudo stop command has occurred. If the structure is configured to perform this, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the above embodiment. Therefore, the stop information setting process may be performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant speed, or the stop information setting process may be performed after the instruction monitor display process is performed.

(10) In the first embodiment, a slip table for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win and a slip table for pseudo stop control in a pseudo game based on a pseudo game lottery win are stored in advance. In this case, when a pseudo-stop command is generated, the slip table is referred to. However, this configuration will be changed.

In the stop position determination process shown in FIG. 22, if it is determined in step S1103 that the pseudo game flag is set, the process advances to step S1104, and if it is a pseudo game based on an additional lottery win, the stop symbol number is "15". If the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the left reel 32L or the middle reel 32M, set "15" as the stop symbol number, and the reel to be pseudo-stopped is the right reel. If it is 32R, set "16" as the stop symbol number. Since the stop symbol number has been set, the processing in step S1107 and step S1108 is not performed.

In the case of such a configuration, in addition to being able to achieve the same effects as the above embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a sliding table in advance, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. .

(11) In the first embodiment, the structure is such that it is possible to slide a maximum of 19 symbols in the pseudo game, but similarly to the main game, within a predetermined time after the pseudo stop command is generated. A pseudo-stop configuration may also be used.

However, in such a configuration, if the pseudo-game stop information is set after the pseudo-stop command is generated, it will not be possible to slide four symbols due to the time required to set the pseudo-game stop information. Possible.

Therefore, when adopting a configuration that performs the same stop control as the main game, the stop information for the main game and the stop information for the pseudo game are set in the stop information setting process. At this time, the stop information for the main game is set in the first area of the stop information storage area 106b, and the stop information for the pseudo game is set in the second area of the stop information storage area 106b.

In such a configuration, although the time required for the stop information setting process becomes longer, there is no need to set the stop information for the main game when transitioning from the pseudo game to the main game, It becomes possible to quickly shift to playing games.

At this time, when setting pseudo game stop information based on the additional lottery win, set the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game as the pseudo game stop information, When setting pseudo game stop information based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of losing in the main game is set as the pseudo game stop information. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo game and the stop information for the real game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(12) In the first embodiment, the pseudo game stop information is not set in the stop information setting process, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, in the reel control process shown in FIG. 15, it is determined in step S403 whether or not a pseudo game flag is set. Then, when the pseudo game flag is set, in the stop information setting process, the stop information for the pseudo game is set instead of the stop information for the main game. If the pseudo game flag is not set, stop information for the main game is set in the stop information setting process. At this time, if the pseudo game stop information is set, that is, after the pseudo game ends, the pseudo game stop information is rewritten to the real game stop information. That is, the storage area where the pseudo game stop information is set and the storage area where the real game stop information is set are the same area. Then, the configuration is such that the process of step S1104 in the stop position determination process is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the stop information storage area 106b from increasing.

At this time, when setting pseudo game stop information based on the additional lottery win, set the stop information set in the situation where only BB1 is won in this game as the pseudo game stop information, When setting pseudo game stop information based on winning, the stop information set in the situation of losing in the main game is set as the pseudo game stop information. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to share the stop information for the pseudo game and the stop information for the real game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance.

(13) In the first embodiment, a sliding table for the pseudo game is prepared in advance, but it may also be configured to set stop information in the same way as for the main game.

(14) In the first embodiment, when the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R pseudo-stops on the middle line L2 in the pseudo game, a benefit is provided to notify that the net increase in the number of coins increases. Although the configuration has been described in which bonuses are awarded, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and any configuration may be used as long as a bonus that is different from the bonus that is awarded when a winning is established, such as medal payout, is awarded. Typical examples of benefits that are different from the benefits given when a prize is won include, for example, performing a setting suggestion performance, and suggesting a winning combination in the subsequent main game.

(15) In the first embodiment, the pseudo game is performed in the case of winning the additional lottery and in the case of winning the pseudo game lottery, but the conditions for performing the pseudo game are arbitrary.

For example, a pseudo game is performed in the final game of the notification mode.

For example, if a rare combination is won, a pseudo game is performed regardless of whether the additional lottery is successful or not.

(16) In the first embodiment described above, when winning the top-up lottery, the pseudo game is executed in the relevant game round, but it may also be configured to perform the pseudo-game in the next game round after winning the top-up lottery. . In the case of such a configuration, it becomes possible to start the next game round after making the player understand that he or she has won the rare combination, that is, that the additional lottery has been carried out. Therefore, it is possible to start the next game round while making the player look forward to the start of the pseudo game, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Note that the pseudo game may be executed a predetermined number of times, such as after five games, instead of the next game time.

(17) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the system does not notify whether or not an additional reel has been added. It may also be configured to notify whether or not it has been completed.

(18) In the first embodiment described above, if a cancel operation is performed while all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, no notification will be made as to whether or not there has been a top-up lottery, but no notification will be made as to whether or not the top-up lottery has been won. For example, although the remaining number of payouts displayed in the main game is updated, the remaining number of payouts displayed in the main game may not be updated even if the additional lottery is won. In such a configuration, the unannounced number of additional coins may be notified in a subsequent pseudo game, or may be notified in the final game of the notification mode.

(19) In the first embodiment, the auxiliary display section 65 is configured to notify that it is a pseudo game, but the structure is not limited to this, and there is a means for notifying that it is a pseudo game. Any configuration is sufficient as long as it includes the following. That is, a configuration may be provided in which a pseudo game lamp is lit only during the pseudo game, or a configuration may be adopted in which the stopped reels are swung up and down during the pseudo game to notify that the pseudo game is in progress. .

(20) In the second embodiment, the standby process is performed for 100 msec, but the length can be set to any length as long as it can be expected that the swinging of the reel will settle down.

(21) In the second embodiment, the configuration is such that the standby process is performed to wait for 100 msec after determining that the instruction monitor is not being displayed or after clearing the instruction monitor, but this is not limited to such a position. The standby process can be performed at any position after determining that the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, that is, after determining the stop positions of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the closer the process is to determine whether or not the value of the reel rotation number counter is 0, the more it becomes necessary to set a longer time than 100 msec as the waiting time in the standby process, so it is necessary to start the next game round. There are concerns that it may take a long time until this becomes possible.

(22) In the second embodiment, after it is determined that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the stop symbol number, all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. However, after it is determined that all stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the stop symbol number. It may be configured to determine whether or not it has occurred. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, it may be configured to determine whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, 32R has become the stop symbol number after transmitting the operation end command. In other words, the configuration may be such that the all reel stop completion command is sent after the operation end command is sent.

(23) In the second embodiment, after sending the all reel stop completion command, it is determined whether all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. The configuration may be such that the all reel stop completion command is sent after determining that the switches 42 to 44 are not operated. At this time, if the configuration is such that the operation end command is sent after the all reel stop completion command is sent, it can be expected that the same effects as in the second embodiment can be achieved.

(24) In the second embodiment, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the stop symbol number, and if all the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated. Although the order of determining whether the state has been reached and the order of transmitting the all reel stop completion command and the operation end command are the same, they may be different. For example, after determining that the symbol number of the reached symbol on all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has reached the stop symbol number, it is determined whether or not all the stop switches 42 to 44 are in an unoperated state. On the other hand, the command transmission order is such that the all reel stop completion command is transmitted after the operation end command. However, if such a configuration is adopted, there is a concern that the processing configuration will become complicated and the storage capacity will increase.

(25) In the second embodiment, the all reel stop completion command is sent when the symbol number of the reached symbol on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes the stop symbol number, but the left reel A configuration may also be adopted in which the stop completion commands for the reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R are transmitted individually. More specifically, in step S2204, if it is determined that the left reel 32L and right reel 32R have reached the stop symbol number, but the middle reel 32M has not reached the stop symbol number, the left reel stop completion command is issued. Send a right reel stop completion command and wait until the middle reel 32M reaches the stop symbol number. If the middle reel 32M reaches the stop symbol number, the process advances to step S2206 after transmitting the middle reel stop completion command. In such a configuration, if the display control device 81 is configured to output the third notification sound when all of the left reel stop completion command, middle reel stop completion command, and right reel stop completion command are received, the second It can be expected that the same effects as in the embodiment will be achieved.

The same applies to the operation end command, and a configuration may be adopted in which the left operation end command, middle operation end command, and right operation end command are sent individually.

(26) In the second embodiment, the all reel stop completion command and the operation end command are sent in the main game, but in the structure in which a pseudo game is performed as in the first embodiment, In a pseudo game, an all reel stop completion command or an operation end command may be transmitted.

(27) In the third embodiment, both the pseudo game flag storage area and the header are configured with one byte, but it goes without saying that they may be configured with two or more bytes.

(28) In the third embodiment, the pseudo game flag storage area and the header are configured to be the same byte, but they may be configured to be different bytes. For example, the pseudo game flag storage area may consist of 1 byte, and the header may consist of 2 bytes. Even in such a configuration, if the header is created by adding the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area and a predetermined 1 byte of the header information, the above The same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(29) In the third embodiment, the configuration is such that the header information transmitted in the case of the main game is stored in advance, but this configuration is changed.

In the third embodiment described above, the pseudo game flag storage area and the fifth bit of the header are blank, but the fifth bit is configured to have a function as a real game flag storage bit and a real game identification bit. When clearing the pseudo game flag (see step S611, FIG. 17 or step S1004, FIG. 21), the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0", and the pseudo game flag storage area is The configuration is such that the fifth bit is set to "1". When setting the pseudo game flag (step S504, see FIG. 16), the 6th bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "1", and the 5th bit of the pseudo game flag storage area is set to "0". The configuration is to set.

It is clear that even with such a configuration, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(30) In the third embodiment, the information indicating whether or not it is a pseudo game is included in the header, but it may be included in the body or in the header. . Even with these configurations, the body to be sent is created by adding pseudo game judgment information to the body information, or the header to be sent is created by adding pseudo game judgment information to the header information. In this case, it is clear that the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(31) In the third embodiment, the header is created by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information, but the header is created by performing other predetermined operations such as subtraction. Even in this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

(32) In the third embodiment, the command to be sent when it is a pseudo game is different from the command to be sent when it is to be a real game, but this configuration is changed.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which a command to be sent when the device is in the BB state is different from a command to be sent when the device is in the non-BB state. In such a configuration, a BB status storage area is provided for storing information on whether the BB status is present, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the BB status storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a command to be transmitted in a normal section and a command to be transmitted in an advantageous section are different. In such a configuration, an advantageous section storage area is provided that stores information on whether the section is an advantageous section, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the advantageous section storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which a command to be sent in the notification mode (AT game) and a command to be sent in the non-notification mode (non-AT game) are different. In such a configuration, a notification mode storage area is provided that stores information as to whether the notification mode is set, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the notification mode storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, a configuration is adopted in which a command to be transmitted in a three-coin game and a command to be transmitted in a two-coin game are different. In such a configuration, a bet number storage area is provided to store information on whether or not it is a 3-card game, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area and header information. When configured, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved.

For example, there are commands to be sent when the player is in the BB1 state (BB state for a 3-card game), commands to be sent when the player is in the BB2 state (BB state for a 2-card game), and commands to be sent when the player is in a non-BB state. The configuration is such that the . In such a configuration, a gaming state storage area is provided that stores information on which gaming state is in, and a header is created by adding the information stored in the gaming state storage area and header information. In this case, the same effects as in the third embodiment can be achieved. In addition, in order to include information indicating which of the three types of gaming states is in the header, it is necessary to prepare at least two bits for storing the above information in the gaming state storage area and the header. be.

Note that it is naturally possible to combine each of the above configurations. For example, by adding the pseudo game determination information and the information stored in the bet number storage area to the header information, it can be determined whether it is a pseudo game or not, and whether it is a 3-coin game or a 2-coin game. It is also possible to create a header containing the following. In addition, by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information, a header that includes whether or not it is a pseudo game is created, and by adding the information stored in the bet number storage area to the body information, the 3-coin game It is also possible to create a body including whether the game is a 2-card game or a 2-card game.

(33) In the third embodiment, when transmitting the rotation start command, stop command, and stop command, the header is created by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information. It goes without saying that when transmitting other commands such as result commands, the header may be created by adding the pseudo game determination information to the header information.

(34) Instead of or in addition to the third embodiment, the sixth bit of the pseudo game flag storage area may be electrically connected to the output port. In such a configuration, when the pseudo game flag is set (“1” is stored in the 6th bit), an ON signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10, and the pseudo game flag is cleared (“1” is stored in the 6th bit). If "0" is stored in the 6th bit, an OFF signal is output to the outside of the slot machine 10. Therefore, the information stored in the pseudo game flag storage area has the function of information used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and outputs a signal to the outside of the slot machine 10 indicating that it is a pseudo game. It becomes possible to provide a function as information used when doing so. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the pseudo game flag storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

(35) In the fourth embodiment, the result display is started when the effect switch 67 is operated once, but if the result display is started based on the operation of the effect switch 67, , the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. Therefore, for example, it may be configured to start displaying the results when the production switch 67 is repeatedly pressed a predetermined number of times, such as 10 times, or it may start displaying the results when the production switch 67 is pressed for a predetermined period of time, such as 5 seconds. It may also be a configuration.

(36) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the press-down display is started when the operation end command is received, but the configuration may be such that the press-down display is started when the all reel stop completion command is received. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the press-down display is started when a section command is received, or a configuration in which the press-down display is started when a status command is received. In any of these configurations, the press-down display is started after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, so that the above-described effects can be achieved.

(37) In the fourth embodiment, the press-down display is started when an operation end command is received, but for example, the press-down display may be started at the timing when it is decided to execute the press-down display in the production determination process. The configuration may be such that the press-down display starts in the middle of a game round. In such a configuration, in the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined in step S3601 whether a completion flag is set. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation becomes effective immediately as in the case where the press effect is not executed, and when the operation end command is received, the menu start operation becomes effective immediately. If the completion flag is not set, the menu start operation becomes valid based on the value of the first timer or the second timer, as described in the fourth embodiment.

(38) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the first timer is set to 1000 after the press display starts, but when the operation end command is received, the value of the first timer is set to 1000. Alternatively, the first timer may be set to 1000 when an all reel stop completion command is received. Alternatively, the first timer value may be set to 1000 when a section command is received, or the first timer value may be set to 1000 when a status command is received. Even with these configurations, the above-described effects can be achieved because only the timing at which the first timer starts operating changes.

(39) In the fourth embodiment, the second timer value is set to 300 when the result display is executed to the end, but when the result display is started, the second timer value is set to 500. It may also be configured to set. It is clear that even with such a configuration, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

Note that if the configuration is such that the completion flag is set when the value of the second timer reaches 300, and the result display image data is displayed according to the value of the second timer, the fourth embodiment described above may be used. The display counter used in the embodiment becomes unnecessary.

Furthermore, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether the value of the second timer is 300 or less in step S4104 of the press effect processing shown in FIG. 61, the completion flag becomes unnecessary.

(40) In the fourth embodiment, the second timer value is set to 300 when the result display is executed to the end, but this configuration is changed.

Specifically, when the result display is executed to the end, it is determined whether the value of the first timer is 0 or not. Then, if the value of the first timer is not 0, the menu start operation becomes valid when the value of the first timer becomes 0, that is, the value of the second timer is not referenced. The configuration is such that the result display process ends without setting the timer value to 300. On the other hand, if the value of the first timer is 0, the menu start operation is valid when the value of the second timer reaches 0, not the first timer, so set the value of the second timer to 300. After that, the result display process ends.

In the case of the above configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, in a situation where the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the first timer, the second timer does not operate and the second timer does not operate. In a situation where the menu start operation is valid based on the value of the second timer, the first timer can be configured not to operate, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

(41) In the fourth embodiment, the display control device 81 is provided with the first timer, and the menu start operation is sometimes enabled based on the value of the first timer. 101 may be provided with a first timer, and a time elapsed command may be sent to the display control device 81 when the value of the first timer becomes 0. In such a configuration, if the completion flag is set when the time elapsed command is received, the display control device 81 is configured to end the press effect processing and enable the subsequent menu start operation, If the completion flag is not set when the command is received, the push effect processing is ended when the value of the second timer becomes 0, and the subsequent menu start operation is made valid. With such a configuration, in addition to the effects described in the fourth embodiment, the main controller 101 can specify the timing at which the press-down display starts and the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the chances of malfunction occurring.

Note that the timing for setting the value of the first timer to 1000 may be configured such that it is set when it is determined in step S3304 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached the stop position, or it may be set when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to the stop position in step S3306. The stop switches 42 to 44 may be set when it is determined that they are not operated. Alternatively, it may be configured to be set at another timing, such as after transmitting the operation end command.

(42) In the fourth embodiment, the result display that is executed when the player has won the additional lottery, and the result display that is executed when the additional lottery has not been won, are executed until the end. Although a configuration in which the required time is the same is used, it goes without saying that different configurations may be used. Even in such a configuration, if the second timer is set to 300 after displaying the results to the end, when the menu start operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer, the result It is possible to make the time from when the display is executed to the end until the menu start operation becomes effective to be constant.

(43) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the second timer is set to 300, but any value can be set to the second timer. The same applies to the first timer and standby timer.

(44) In the fourth embodiment, the value of the standby timer is not set to 18000 in the press effect processing, but if the value of the second timer is set to 0 in step S4106, the value of the standby timer is The configuration may be such that the press effect processing is ended after setting 18,000 to 18,000. In the case of such a configuration, the customer waiting effect will start approximately 180 seconds after the press effect process ends.

(45) In the fourth embodiment, the menu start operation is enabled immediately when the press effect is not executed, but the menu start operation becomes effective after about 10 seconds even when the press effect is not executed. It may be configured as follows. For example, in the operation end command process shown in FIG. 55, when it is determined that the operation end command has been received, the configuration for realizing this configuration is to set the standby timer value to 18000 and set the first timer value to 1000. The configuration is to set. In step S3505, the value of the first timer is not set to 1000. Then, in the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, when it is determined that the effect flag is not set, it is configured to determine whether the value of the first timer becomes 0 or not. If it is determined that the value of the first timer has become 0, the configuration is such that the processes shown from step S3603 onwards are performed.

(46) In the fourth embodiment, when a menu start operation is performed, the menu screen is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, but the menu screen display section is provided separately from the auxiliary display section 65, and the A configuration may be adopted in which the menu screen is always displayed on the menu screen display section.

(47) In the fourth embodiment, the effect switch 67 has the function of advancing the press effect and the function of displaying the menu screen. It may be configured to be provided separately from the switch 67.

(48) In the fourth embodiment, the selection menu includes the game history, payout table, volume adjustment, and clear game history, but the types and number of selection menus are arbitrary. It is. Therefore, the configuration may include a payout table and volume adjustment, or the configuration may include only volume adjustment. In addition, in a configuration having only one type of game information to be displayed, it goes without saying that when the effect switch 67 is operated, the game information may be directly displayed instead of the menu screen.

(49) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that the success or failure of the additional lottery is notified in the press effect, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration is also configured to notify whether or not the transition lottery has been won in the chance mode. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the winning combination.

(50) In the fourth embodiment, a configuration using a timer that is subtracted has been described, but it goes without saying that a timer that is added may be used.

(51) In the fourth embodiment, the configuration is such that when the value of the first timer is set to 1000, the subtraction of the first timer is started, but this configuration is changed. The first timer is configured to be set to 1000 at an arbitrary timing before starting the press display, such as at the timing when a start command is generated. Then, in step S3505 (see FIG. 55) of the operation end command processing, the configuration is such that subtraction of the first timer is permitted. Even in the case of such a configuration, the operation timing of the first timer is when the process in step S3505 is performed, so that the effects described in the fourth embodiment can be achieved.

(52) In the fourth embodiment, if a bet number command indicating that the number of bets has become 1 or more is received during the press effect process, the press effect process is ended and the process shifts to a start command waiting process. It is also possible to have a configuration in which In the case of such a configuration, the press-down display or result display displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 ends at the timing when the player bets the medals or virtual medals.

(53) In the fourth embodiment described above, the explanation was given from this perspective by focusing on the timing at which the menu start operation becomes effective when the press effect is executed, but the customer waiting effect when the press effect is executed. It is clear that the same effects as those described above can be achieved with respect to the timing of transition to . This is because, as is clear from the start waiting process shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether the value of the standby timer becomes 0 after the press effect process is finished.

(54) In the fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the exhaustion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the last game of the notification mode, but all reels 32L, 32M, 32R It may also be configured to display an end screen after stopping.

(55) In the fifth embodiment, when the notification mode ends due to the exhaustion of the number of transition games, the end screen is displayed at the start of the last game in the notification mode, but at least one reel stops. If the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed beforehand, the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved. This is because sufficient time for displaying the end screen can be secured.

At this time, if the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed after the two reels have stopped, it is possible to know whether or not a bell has been won, at least if the push order bell is won. It becomes possible to display the difference in the number of sheets at the end of the notification mode as the number of sheets.

(56) In the fifth embodiment, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends when the difference number of sheets reaches 2400, but in addition to this, the ending effect is performed when the notification mode ends when the number of section games reaches 1500. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following.

(57) In the fifth embodiment, the notification mode is configured to end depending on the number of games played under the notification mode, but the notification mode is configured to end depending on the number of notifications in the order of operations performed under the notification mode. Good too. Even in such a configuration, if the configuration is such that the end screen is displayed not based on the reception of the start command but based on the reception of the lottery result command indicating that the push order bell has been won, the above-mentioned fifth The effects described in the embodiment can be achieved.

(58) In the fifth embodiment described above, only the display control device 81 is configured to know the number of post-notification games, but it is also possible to have a configuration in which only the main control device 101 is aware of the number of post-notification games. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which both the main control device 101 and the display control device 81 know the number of later notification games.

(59) In the fifth embodiment, when winning the top-up lottery, the number of top-up games is notified in a pseudo game, and the number of top-up games is notified in a revival performance. It may be configured to notify the number of additional games only in the revival performance.

(60) In the fifth embodiment described above, an additional lottery is performed when a rare combination is won under the notification mode, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the notification mode continues with a revival performance. Any configuration is sufficient as long as it can notify the user of the situation. For example, the notification mode may be configured to end after 50 games in one set, and a set number addition lottery (resurrection lottery or continuous lottery) may be performed in a predetermined game such as when transitioning to the notification mode or at the end of one set.

(61) In the fifth embodiment described above, the conditions for determining the end of the notification mode with the difference number of sheets of 2400 are that the remaining number of games is greater than 50 and that the difference number of sheets is greater than 2200. Setting of conditions is arbitrary. Only the number of remaining games may be set as a condition, or only the difference in the number of sheets may be set as a condition.

(62) In the fifth embodiment, the ending effect is started from the next game when the end of the notification mode is confirmed due to the number of difference sheets of 2400, but the timing to start the ending effect is arbitrary. The ending effect may be started from the next game when the difference in number of sheets reaches 2300, or the ending effect may be started from the next game when the difference in the number of sheets reaches 2250. That is, it is sufficient to start with the number of games corresponding to the length of the prepared ending video.

(63) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen is continuously displayed until the transition from the normal section to the chance mode, but the end screen is displayed only in the first game, and from the second game onwards, the end screen is displayed continuously. It may also be configured to perform auxiliary effects.

(64) In the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section ends when the notification mode ends, and the advantageous section does not end under the chance mode. It may also be configured such that an event that terminates occurs. For example, in addition to the lottery for transitioning to the notification mode under the chance mode, a lottery for ending the advantageous section may be performed, or the configuration may be configured to transition to the chance mode after the notification mode ends.

(65) In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition from the normal section to the notification mode is not performed, but a configuration may be adopted in which the transition is made to the notification mode.

(66) In the fifth embodiment, the suggestion jewel or the confirmed jewel is displayed if the lottery to enter the chance mode is not won. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the suggested jewel or the confirmed jewel is displayed when the transfer lottery is won.

(67) In the fifth embodiment, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is suggested or notified by the suggestion or confirmed orb, but any configuration that suggests or informs advantageous information advantageous to the player may be used. , the effects described in the fifth embodiment can be achieved. Examples of advantageous information include, for example, in a configuration that includes multiple chance modes with different winning probabilities for the lottery to transition to the notification mode, a configuration that suggests or informs the destination of the chance mode, and a configuration that suggests or informs the destination of the chance mode, or a ceiling game number under the chance mode (transition game In a configuration in which a plurality of numbers can be set, a typical example is a configuration in which the number of ceiling games to be set is suggested or notified.

(68) In the fifth embodiment, the guaranteed orb is displayed after the 6th game of the normal section, but the confirmed orb is also displayed with a predetermined probability in the 1st to 5th games of the normal section. It may also be a configuration. In other words, any configuration may be sufficient as long as the accuracy of setting suggestions increases according to the number of games played in the normal section.

(69) In the fifth embodiment, the suggestion jewel and the confirmed jewel are displayed at the start of the game, but the timing of displaying them is arbitrary. Furthermore, although the suggested orb and the confirmed orb are not displayed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, they may be continuously displayed until the chance mode is entered. Further, in a configuration capable of displaying a menu screen, when a game history is selected, the suggested orbs and confirmed orbs that have been displayed up to that point may be displayed.

(70) In the fifth embodiment, the end screen is configured to display the fact that the notification mode ends and the number of medals acquired, but it may also be configured to display only that the notification mode ends. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that only the number of acquired medals is displayed. In addition, the indication that the notification mode ends is not limited to the actual text such as "end of notification mode", but also the indication that the notification mode ends by a predetermined action such as a predetermined character waving his hands while crying. You may notify.

(71) In the fifth embodiment, when the end screen is displayed, the display of the number of medals won is not changed after that. However, when the end screen is displayed in the final game in the notification mode, the The display of the number of medals won may be changed depending on the game result (whether or not a prize is won). Furthermore, the display of the number of medals acquired may be changed even in the normal section.

(72) In each of the above embodiments, the transfer lottery and the additional lottery are performed only in the 3-card game, but the configuration may be such that the transfer lottery and the additional lottery are performed also in the 2-card game.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, the notification mode is configured to end when the net increase in the number of coins reaches 120, but the notification mode may be configured to end when the number of paid-out coins reaches 120. , the notification mode may be configured to end when the number of games has reached 50.

(74) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which a continuation lottery is performed in the notification mode ending game, or a configuration in which a continuation lottery is performed in the notification mode transition game. Further, a continuous lottery may be performed in a predetermined game under the notification mode. Then, it may be configured to notify the results of these continuous lottery results in a pseudo game.

(75) In each of the above embodiments, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won under the chance mode, but it is configured that the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified with a lower probability than in the notification mode. Good too.

(76) In each of the above embodiments, the advantageous section also ends when the notification mode ends, but it may be configured to shift to the chance mode without ending the advantageous period when the notification mode ends. .

(77) In each of the above embodiments, when a winning combination is won in a 3-card game, the mode shifts from the normal section to the chance mode, and the configuration is such that the probability of winning is only about 1 in 6.4. The probability of being out is arbitrary. However, as the number of games played in the normal section increases, the chance for the player to realize that the player is in the normal section increases, so it is desirable to have a configuration in which the probability of winning any winning combination is higher than the probability of losing. .

(78) In each of the above embodiments, the section indicator 66 is provided at the lower right corner of the payout number display section 61, but the section indicator 66 may be provided at any position. However, in order to reduce the chance that the player will notice that the game has ended in an advantageous period, it is desirable to arrange it at a position away from the auxiliary display section 65, for example, it is desirable to provide it at the payment switch 59.

(79) In each of the above embodiments, the process related to the game mode such as the transition lottery is performed on the condition that it is a 3-coin game, but the transition lottery is performed on the condition that it is a 3-coin game and not in a BB state. It may also be configured to perform processing related to gaming modes such as.

(80) In each of the above embodiments, the section indicator 66 is turned off and turned off during the game section process, but it may be turned off and turned off during the start waiting process. Even in the case of such a configuration, since the section display 66 is turned off after the end of the advantageous section end game, it can be expected that the same effects as in the above embodiment can be achieved. Similarly, although the section indicator 66 is configured to be turned ON during the section lottery process, it may be configured to be turned ON after the rotation start process and before determining whether or not the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. Good too.

(81) In each of the above embodiments, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the transition to an advantageous section occurs. The configuration may be such that notification is provided, or the configuration may be such that the operation timing and operation method are notified. That is, the advantageous section may be any gaming section in which the instruction function of the stop switch can be activated. Note that the normal section may be any game section in which the instruction function of the stop switch for establishing a small winning combination does not operate.

(82) In each of the above embodiments, the combinations of symbols that result in winning are merely examples, and the combinations of symbols are not limited to these combinations. Further, the number of combinations of symbols that result in a winning is also arbitrary.

(83) In each of the above embodiments, a slot machine with a BB state has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a slot machine without a BB state may be used. It may also be a slot machine with both states. Furthermore, the slot machine may have other gaming states such as a CB state or an MB state.

(84) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that it is determined whether a start command is generated after three or two medals are bet, but a start command is also generated after one medal is bet. It goes without saying that the structure may be configured to determine whether or not. It goes without saying that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is determined whether or not a start command has been issued only after three medals have been bet, that is, a configuration in which only three medal games can be played.

(85) In each of the above embodiments, in addition to the privilege of shifting the gaming state and the privilege of replaying, the privileges provided include the privilege of paying out medals, but the present invention is limited to such a structure. It is sufficient to have a configuration in which some kind of benefit is given to the player. For example, instead of the privilege of paying out medals, a configuration may be adopted in which prizes other than medals are paid out. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credit for medals owned by a player, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a benefit.

(86) In each of the above embodiments, a slot machine is described in which three reels are arranged in parallel and one active line is provided, but the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, five reels are arranged in parallel. The slot machine may be a slot machine equipped with 5 active lines or a slot machine with 5 active lines.

(87) In each of the above embodiments, the reel stop position is determined in the normal process, and the reel is stopped in the timer interrupt process. A configuration may also be adopted in which processing is performed to stop the . Specifically, when the stop symbol number is determined in step S1108 of the stop position determination process shown in FIG. Performs processing to stop the reels. Thereafter, the processing shown from step S1109 onwards is performed. In such a configuration, after stopping the reel where the stop command (pseudo stop command) has been generated, it is checked whether the next stop command (pseudo stop command) has occurred. It becomes impossible to continuously generate pseudo-stop commands.

(88) In each of the above embodiments, in the reel control process, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached a constant speed (step S407, see FIG. 15). If the time from the start until the speed reaches a constant speed is uniform, a timer corresponding to the time is set when starting the reel acceleration (step S607, see FIG. 17), and the timer is set according to the time in step S407. It may be configured to wait until a time corresponding to the timer value has elapsed. It is clear that even with such a configuration, the same effects as those of the above embodiment can be achieved.

(89) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example was shown regarding the slot machine 10, but the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, in place of the medal insertion and medal payout functions among slot machines, it may be a gaming machine that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Hereinafter, the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

Game machine A1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circulating displays of the symbols on the circulating display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) ends the pseudo-game. Migration preparation processing function S412) in
If the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, a pseudo game second ending means (main controller 101) that ends the pseudo game. The pseudo game flag clearing function S1004) during the rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, and 42R is configured to be executable,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the control by the second pseudo-game ending means is performed, the pseudo-game ends without pseudo-stopping the circular display of the symbols on the circulation display means.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the pseudo game, the circular display of the symbols is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circular display of the symbols of the corresponding circular display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of the symbols, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the structure to be able to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the circulation display means, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players may find it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in a pseudo game. Therefore, in this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is ended. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who finds it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in a simulated game from decreasing his or her desire to play when the simulated game is started.

Furthermore, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulating display means are displaying the pictures in a circular manner, the circulating display of the pictures on the circulating display means does not pseudo-stop, and the picture on the circulating display means The pseudo game is configured to end while the cyclical display continues. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is impossible to grasp the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-game without operating the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine A2. In the game machine A1, a second start control means (acceleration start of the main control device 101 in the main game) that performs control to start the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of the symbols in the pseudo game. processing function S607, stepping motor control processing function S106), and when the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, a response is taken to stop the circular display of the symbols. a second stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 in this game of the main control device 101) that controls the circulation display means to A gaming machine characterized in that the privilege is awarded based on a control result by a control means.

According to this game machine, the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means which has been pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game is started again, and the circular display of the symbols is stopped when the stop operation means is operated. Then, a privilege is awarded based on the result of stopping such a symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of an event in which the circular display of symbols does not stop at the stage of starting the next game round. In addition, in such a configuration, when the specific operation means is operated and the pseudo game ends while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is ended without going through the control by the second start control means. It becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine A3. The above-mentioned gaming machine A2 is characterized in that it includes pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the pseudo-game is a pseudo-game when the pseudo-game execution means executes the pseudo-game. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. With this configuration, even if the simulated game ends without the cyclical display of symbols stopping, the player will not be able to tell whether it is a simulated game or a game related to awarding benefits. It is possible to avoid the problem of being lost.

Game machine A4. In the gaming machine A2 or gaming machine A3, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols cyclically, A game machine characterized by comprising a deceleration means for decelerating a display for a predetermined period of time.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are performing the circulation display of the symbols, the circulation display of the symbols is slowed down for a predetermined period of time. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player that the pseudo game ends through a decrease in the circulation display speed of the symbols.

Game machine A5. In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game executing means is configured to perform the pseudo-game execution means when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols. Specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 performed via step S1003 of the main controller 101, stepping motor control A gaming machine characterized by comprising a processing function S106).

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols is performed to pseudo-stop the circulation display of all the symbols. cyclic display means are controlled. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the simulated game without operating the stop operation means during the simulated game can complete the simulated game without operating the stop operation means by operating the specific operation means. It becomes possible to end the game.

Game machine A6. In the gaming machine A5, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols in a stopping manner different from the case where the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display means performing the circulation display of symbols is stopped by the stop operation means. To pseudo-stop the circular display of pictures in a stopping manner different from that when is operated. With this configuration, it is possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on whether the pseudo game is ended by operating the specific operation means or the pseudo game is ended by operating the stop operation means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to make the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means clear, and it becomes possible to allow the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine A7. In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the pseudo-game executing means is configured to perform the pseudo-game execution means when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulating display means pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols. A game machine characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols of the circulating display means that is performing the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To finish a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs circulation display of pictures by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine A8. In the gaming machine A7, the second start control means is characterized in that when the pseudo game ends, the second start control means performs control so as to start the cyclic display of the symbols of the cyclic display means that has pseudo-stopped the cyclic display of the symbols. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if there is a circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols when the pseudo game ends, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means is started. With this configuration, it is possible to use all the circulation display means to play games related to awarding benefits.

Game machine A9. In any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means and the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the cyclic display speed of symbols in the pseudo game and the cyclic display speed of symbols in the game related to awarding benefits are equal. With this configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. It becomes possible.

Game machine A10. In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, a determining means (of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not to grant a specific benefit (addition of the net increase number counter) different from the benefit granted by the benefit granting means. A gaming machine comprising an additional lottery winning confirmation function (S1804), and configured such that the specific condition is satisfied when the determining means determines to grant the specific benefit.

According to this gaming machine, when the privilege awarding means determines to award a specific benefit different from the award given, the specific condition is satisfied and a pseudo game is executed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to use the pseudo game as a game to notify that a specific benefit will be given, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine A11. In the gaming machine A10, when the pseudo-stopping result of the symbol becomes a specific stopping result (the combination of "Red 7" symbols stops on the middle line L2) under the control of the pseudo-stopping control means, the specific benefit The present invention further comprises an award notification means (auxiliary display section 65) that notifies that the specific benefit will be awarded and does not notify that the specific benefit will be awarded if the pseudo stop result of the symbol does not become the specific stop result. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo stop result of a symbol in a pseudo game becomes a specific stop result, it is announced that a specific benefit will be awarded. On the other hand, if the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-game does not result in a specific stopping result, no notification will be given that a specific benefit will be awarded. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt players who wish to be notified of the granting of specific benefits to operate the stop operation means, while allowing players who do not need to be notified of the granting of specific benefits to operate the specific operating means. It becomes possible.

Game machine A12. In the gaming machine A11, there is an advantageous state transition means (notification mode transition function S1608 of the main controller 101) for shifting to an advantageous state (notification mode) advantageous to the player, and the number of games that can be played under the advantageous condition. and a number information storage means (a net increase number counter of the main controller 101) for storing information (remaining number of payouts), and the specific benefit is a benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under the advantageous condition. A game machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, a privilege that increases the number of games that can be played under advantageous conditions is provided as a specific privilege. With such a configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated in a pseudo game, it is possible to avoid disadvantages to the player.

Furthermore, "a benefit that increases the number of games that can be played under an advantageous condition" refers to a benefit that increases the number of games that can be played if the advantageous condition ends based on the number of games played, and If the configuration is such that the advantageous state ends based on the number of awarded game media, then a benefit that increases the number of awarded game media is applicable.

Game machine A13. In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

According to this gaming machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player will operate the specific operation means unintentionally. For example, it is possible to set the start operation means to be a specific operation means, but if a player hits the start operation means repeatedly when starting a game, the pseudo game ends even though he/she wanted to enjoy it. This is because an event may occur where the

Game machine B1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circulating displays of the symbols on the circulating display means, the pseudo-game first ending means (after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) ends the pseudo-game. Migration preparation processing function S412) in
A second pseudo game ending means (a pseudo game ending function based on a cancel operation of the main control device 101) that ends the pseudo game when a second specific condition (operation of the payment switch 59) is satisfied is configured to be executable. ,
A second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 of the main control device 101 in the main game, stepping motor control processing function S106);
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; Equipped with a stop position determination processing function S1009 and a stepping motor control processing function S106) in this game of the main control device 101,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second pseudo game ending means executes different processing depending on the pseudo stop state of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, a pseudo game is executed when a specific condition is satisfied. In the pseudo game, the circular display of the symbols is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circular display of the symbols of the corresponding circular display means is pseudo-stopped. Then, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of the symbols, the pseudo game ends. By configuring the structure to be able to execute such a pseudo game, it becomes possible to execute an auxiliary effect using the circulation display means, and it becomes possible to improve the game's interest.

Further, the pseudo game is configured to end also when the second specific condition is satisfied, and when the second specific condition is satisfied and the pseudo game is ended, the pseudo game of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied is The configuration is such that different processes are executed depending on the stop status. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the pseudo stop situation of the circulation display means when the second specific condition is satisfied.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine B2. The gaming machine B1 is configured such that the second specific condition is satisfied when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated, and the benefit granting means is configured to perform the above-mentioned benefit awarding means based on the control result by the second stop control means. A gaming machine that provides a privilege, and wherein the pseudo game second ending means executes different processing depending on the number of stop operation means operated before the specific operation means is operated.

According to this gaming machine, the pseudo game is configured to end even when the specific operating means is operated, and when the specific operating means is operated and the pseudo game is ended, the pseudo game is terminated before the specific operating means is operated. The configuration is such that different processes are executed depending on the number of operated stop operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on the situation in which the specific operation means is operated.

Game machine B3. In the gaming machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means ends the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circular display of the symbols on the circulating display means corresponding to the stop operation means that is not operated. Game machine.

According to this game machine, when the specific operation means is operated, the pseudo game is ended without pseudo-stopping the circular display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the unoperated stop operation means. With such a configuration, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is impossible to grasp the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-game without operating the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the stop-operating means in the pseudo-game. It becomes possible.

Further, in such a configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs circulation display of the patterns by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine B4. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it includes pseudo-game notification means (auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the pseudo-game is a pseudo-game when the pseudo-game execution means executes the pseudo-game. .

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, it is notified that it is a pseudo game. With this configuration, even if the simulated game can be ended without the circular display of symbols stopping in a simulated manner, it is difficult for the player to determine whether the simulated game is a simulated game or a game related to the granting of benefits. This makes it possible to avoid confusion.

Game machine B5. In the gaming machine B3 or gaming machine B4, if there is a plurality of circulating display means that pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols in the pseudo game, the circulating display means that pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols is the circulating display means that pseudo-stops the circulating display of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) related to the timing to start display.

According to this gaming machine, when there is a plurality of circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols in a pseudo game, the circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols is involved in the timing at which the circulation display of symbols starts. Timing information is set individually. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a pseudo-stopping result of a symbol in a pseudo-game becomes an operational aid for the stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B6. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo game to the start of the circular display of the symbols. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the stop result of a symbol in a pseudo game becomes an operational aid for a stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B7. In any of the game machines B3 to B6, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the circulation display of the symbols will be displayed for a predetermined period of time. A game machine characterized by being provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the speed.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are performing the circulation display of the symbols, the circulation display of the symbols is slowed down for a predetermined period of time. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to notify the player that the pseudo game ends through a decrease in the circulation display speed of the symbols.

Game machine B8. In any of the gaming machines B3 to B7, the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the start control means and the circulation display speed of the symbols when controlled by the second start control means are different. A gaming machine characterized by equality.

According to this gaming machine, the cyclic display speed of symbols in the pseudo game and the cyclic display speed of symbols in the game related to awarding benefits are equal. With this configuration, even if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. It becomes possible.

Game machine B9. In the gaming machine B2, the second pseudo-game ending means is configured to pseudo-stop all the circulating displays of the symbols when the specific operating means is operated in a situation where at least one of the stop operating means has been operated. The present invention is characterized by comprising a specific stop control means (stop position determination processing function S1009 and stepping motor control processing function S106 performed through step S1003 of the main control device 101) that controls the circulation display means that performs the circulation display of pictures. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means has been operated, the circulation display means that performs the circulation display of the symbols so as to pseudo-stop all the circulation display of the symbols. controlled. With this configuration, a player who wishes to end the simulated game without operating the stop operation means during the simulated game can complete the simulated game without operating the stop operation means by operating the specific operation means. It becomes possible to end the game.

Game machine B10. In the game machine B9, the specific stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols in a stopping manner different from the case where the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one stop operation means has been operated, the circulation display means that displays the symbols in circulation will be different from the one when the stop operation means is operated. The cyclic display of the pictures is pseudo-stopped using different stopping modes. With this configuration, it is possible to change the manner in which the pseudo game ends depending on whether the pseudo game is ended by operating the specific operation means or the pseudo game is ended by operating the stop operation means. Become. As a result, it becomes possible to make the difference between the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of the stop operation means clear, and it becomes possible to allow the player to select which operation means to operate.

Game machine B11. In the gaming machine B9 or gaming machine B10, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of the symbols in the pseudo game, the circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of the symbols A gaming machine characterized by being provided with timing information setting means (delay time acquisition function S605 of main controller 101) for individually setting timing information (delay time) related to the timing to start display.

According to this gaming machine, when all the circulation display means pseudo-stop the circulation display of symbols in a pseudo game, the circulation display means that pseudo-stops the circulation display of symbols is involved in the timing for starting the circulation display of symbols. Timing information is set individually. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a pseudo-stopping result of a symbol in a pseudo-game becomes an operational aid for the stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B12. The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that the timing information setting means sets the timing information by performing a predetermined lottery.

According to this gaming machine, timing information is set by performing a predetermined lottery. With this configuration, it is possible to randomize the time from the end of the pseudo game to the start of the circular display of the symbols. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that a pseudo-stopping result of a symbol in a pseudo-game becomes an operational aid for a stop operation means in a game related to awarding a bonus.

Game machine B13. In any of the gaming machines B2 to B12, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means.

According to this gaming machine, the specific operation means is an operation means different from the start operation means and the stop operation means. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player will operate the specific operation means unintentionally. For example, it is possible to set the start operation means to be a specific operation means, but if a player hits the start operation means repeatedly when starting a game, the pseudo game ends even though he/she wanted to enjoy it. This is because an event may occur where the

Gaming machine C1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
After the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols and the circular display of the symbols reaches a constant speed, a stop operation determining means (main controller) determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated. 101 stop command confirmation function S1008),
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a second stop control means (stop control in the main control device 101 in the main game) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circulation display of the symbols. Position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
The benefit granting means is configured to grant the benefit based on a control result by the second stop control means,
The second stop control means is configured to operate the stop operation means in a specified operation method (operation order that allows a bell to be won) when the lottery result of the winning combination is a prescribed result (push order bell winning). Then, a specified winning (bell winning) is established, and if the stop operation means is operated by an operation method other than the specified operating method, controlling the plurality of circulation display means so that the specified winning is not established;
If the lottery result of the combination is the stipulated result, an operation method notification means (instruction monitor, payout number display unit 62) capable of notifying the stipulated operation method is provided;
When notifying the prescribed operating method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the operating method informing means informs the prescribed operating method before the stopping operation determining means determines whether or not the stopping operation means has been operated. In the case where the specified operating method is notified in a game round in which the pseudo game is executed, the pseudo stop control means pseudo stops all the circular display of the symbols of the circulation display means in the pseudo game. The gaming machine is characterized in that the specified operating method is notified before the second start control means starts the control for starting the circular display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when the prescribed operation method is notified in a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, the prescribed operation method is notified before the stop operation determination means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. did. With this configuration, in a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, it becomes possible to have the player understand the prescribed operation method and then operate the stop operation means.

Furthermore, in the case of notifying the prescribed operating method in a game round in which a pseudo game is executed, the second start is performed after the pseudo stop control means pseudo stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means in the pseudo game. The prescribed operating method is notified before the control means starts the control for starting the circular display of the pictures. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid operating the stop operation means in a prescribed operation method in a pseudo game, and to avoid operating the stop operation means in a different operation method from the prescribed operation method in a game related to awarding of benefits after a pseudo game. This makes it possible to avoid the situation where the player is unable to receive benefits associated with winning the specified prize due to manipulation.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine C2. In the game machine C1, when the operation method notifying means notifies the prescribed operation method in a game round in which the pseudo game is not executed, the operation method notifying means is configured to notify the prescribed operating method after the cyclical display of all the symbols on the cyclic displaying means reaches a constant speed. A gaming machine characterized by notifying a prescribed operating method.

According to this gaming machine, when notifying the prescribed operation method in a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed, the stop operation determining means The specified operating method is notified before determining whether or not the stop operating means has been operated. With this configuration, it is possible to make the notification timing of the prescribed operation method in a game related to bonus awarding different between a game round in which a pseudo game is executed and a game round in which a pseudo game is not executed. In this way, while ensuring that the specified operating method is announced before the operation of the stop operation means becomes effective, the timing of notification of the specified operating method for games related to awarding benefits is varied depending on whether or not a pseudo game is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to alert the player to check the operation method notification means.

Gaming machine C3. In the gaming machine C1 or gaming machine C2, when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the symbols of all the circulation display means, it is determined whether the lottery result of the combination is the prescribed result or not. If the prescribed determination means (winning combination confirmation function S603 of the main control device 101) and the prescribed determination means determine that the lottery result of the combination is the prescribed result, the prescribed operating method is notified to the operation method notification means. a notification execution means (instruction monitor display function S604 of the main controller 101); and a time information setting means (main a delay time acquisition function S605) of the control device 101, and the second start control means controls the time information setting when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the pictures of all the circulation display means. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to start circulating display of the symbols after a time period corresponding to time information set by the means has elapsed.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the cyclical display of the symbols of all the cyclical display means, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the winning combination is a prescribed result, and the lottery result of the winning combination is determined as follows. If it is determined that the result is a prescribed operating method, the operating method notifying means is made to notify the prescribed operating method, and when the operating method notifying means is made to notify the prescribed operating method, time information is set. When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the symbols of all the circulation display means, the second start control means performs control to start the circular display of the symbols after a period of time corresponding to the time information has elapsed. conduct. With this configuration, when the prescribed operating method is notified after all the circulating display means have pseudo-stopped the circular display of symbols in a pseudo game, the prescribed operating method is notified before the circulating display of symbols starts. It becomes possible to execute it.

Gaming machine C4. Any of the gaming machines C1 to C3 includes at least the pseudo game execution means, the second start control means, the stop operation determination means, and the second stop control means, and controls the game. A main control means (main control device 101) for managing, and a slave control means (display control device 81) for performing various controls under the main control means, and the main control means controls the operation method notification means. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which:

According to this gaming machine, the operation method notification means is controlled by the main control means that centrally manages the game. With this configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid the occurrence of an event in which it is determined whether or not the stop operation means has been operated before the operation method notification means notifies the prescribed operation method.

Gaming machine C5. In any of the game machines C1 to C4, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. is performed, the pseudo game ends without pseudo-stopping of the circulating display of the symbols on the circulating display means, and before the stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized in that said operation method notification means is configured to notify said specified operation method.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying symbols in circulation, the pseudo game can be ended. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player who finds it troublesome to operate the stop operation means in a simulated game from decreasing his or her desire to play when the simulated game is started.

In addition, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game ends without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means pseudo stopping, and The operating method notification means is configured to notify the prescribed operating method before the stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly transition from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits, while reducing the chance of operating the stop operation means with an operation method different from the prescribed operating method in a game related to awarding benefits. It becomes possible to do so.

Game machine D1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game,
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) The preparation processing function S412) is configured to be executable,
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; A stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
a stop information setting means (pseudo-gaming stop information acquisition function S1104 of the main control device 101) for setting stop information (pseudo-game stop information) used when the pseudo-stop control means performs control;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) that sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means performs control based on the lottery result of the winning combination. ) and
The benefit granting means grants the benefit based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the second stop information setting means is configured to provide the benefit when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set during the execution of the game.

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to awarding benefits is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding the bonus is set during the execution of the pseudo game. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it becomes possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine D2. In the gaming machine D1, a stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) determines whether the stop operation means is operated after the start control means starts the circular display of the symbols. ), wherein the stop information setting means sets the stop information when the stop operation determining means determines that the stop operation means has been operated.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set when the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, even if the second stop information is set during the execution of a pseudo game, the time required for the stop operation determining means to judge the operation of the stop operation means in the pseudo game can be reduced. It becomes possible to shorten the time.

Game machine D3. In the gaming machine D2, the stop information setting means sets stop information that causes a pattern attached to one predetermined position to pseudo-stop at a predetermined position, regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets stop information that causes a pattern attached to one predetermined specific position to pseudo-stop at a predetermined position, regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means. do. In this way, by configuring the pseudo-stopping result of the symbols in the pseudo-gaming to be independent of the operation timing of the stop operation means, even if the stop information is set after the stop operation means is operated, It is possible to suppress the delay from when the stop operation means is operated until the cyclical display of the pictures on the corresponding cyclical display means is pseudo-stopped.

Game machine D4. In the game machine D2 or the game machine D3, the second stop control means is controlled to stop the circular display of the symbols from when the stop operation means is operated until a predetermined period of time elapses. The apparatus is characterized in that the pseudo-stop control means is configured to perform control to pseudo-stop the circular display of the patterns after the specified time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, in a game related to bonus awarding, control is performed to stop the circular display of symbols from when the stop operation means is operated until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, in the pseudo game, it is possible to perform control to pseudo-stop the circular display of the symbols after a predetermined time has elapsed since the stop operation means was operated. With this configuration, it is possible to secure time for setting stop information after the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, time for determining the stop position of the circulation display means based on the stop information, etc. becomes possible.

Game machine D5. In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the second stop information setting means is configured such that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the start control means starts the circular display of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set after the pseudo-stop control means performs control to pseudo-stop the circular display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the game related to awarding of benefits is obtained after the start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, and the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops the circular display of the symbols. This is set before the control is performed. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it becomes possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine D6. In any of the game machines D1 to D5, a stop operation determination means (main controller 101 When the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the second stop information setting means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized in that the second stop information is set before the determination is made.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in a game related to bonus provision is set before the stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it becomes possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine D7. In any of the game machines D1 to D6, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (accounting switch 59) is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a simulating game is performed, the simulative game ends without a simulative stop of the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is played without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means being stopped in a pseudo manner. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through control by the second start control means, and it becomes possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. .

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Game machine D9. In any of the game machines D1 to D8, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of the symbols. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols of the circulating display means that is performing the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To finish a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs circulation display of pictures by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Gaming machine E1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
The pseudo game execution means is
Start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in a pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) for controlling the plurality of circulation display means to start the circulation display of the symbols;
stop operation determination means (pseudo stop command confirmation function S1008 of main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the patterns;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means has been operated, a pseudo stop control means (stop in the pseudo game of the main control device 101) controls the corresponding circulation display means to pseudo stop the circulation display of the symbols. position determination processing function S1009, stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) Preparation processing function S412)
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; A stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (stop information for pseudo game) used when the pseudo stop control means performs control;
A second stop information setting means (stop information setting processing function S404 of the main control device 101) that sets second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means performs control based on the lottery result of the winning combination. ) and
The benefit granting means grants the benefit based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means determines that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means Before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not an operation has been performed, the stop information is set in a first storage area, and the second stop information setting means is configured to cause the pseudo game execution means to execute the pseudo game. If so, the second stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to awarding benefits is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and the stop information used in the game related to the awarding of benefits is set in the first storage area. 2. The stop information is set in a second storage area different from the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the second stop information is set after the simulated game ends, it becomes possible to quickly shift from the simulated game to the game related to awarding benefits.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine E2. In the gaming machine E1, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that is set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that is set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. With this configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding benefits, and reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Gaming machine E3. In the game machine E1 or the game machine E2, the stop information setting means is configured to stop the stop information setting means after the start control means starts controlling the plurality of circulation display means when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game. A gaming machine characterized in that information is set in the first storage area.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area after starting the circular display of symbols in the pseudo game. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly start the circular display of symbols when executing a pseudo game.

Game machine E4. In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (accounting switch 59) is operated while all the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a simulating game is performed, the simulative game ends without a simulative stop of the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is played without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means being stopped in a pseudo manner. finish. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without going through control by the second start control means, and it becomes possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits. .

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Gaming machine E5. In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the pseudo-game executing means is configured to control the display of the picture when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means pseudo-stops the circulation display of the picture. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the cyclical display of the symbols of the cyclical display means that is performing the cyclical display.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To finish a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, it becomes possible to control the circulation display means that performs circulation display of pictures by the second stop control means without being controlled by the second start control means. Therefore, it is possible to quickly shift from a pseudo game to a game related to awarding benefits.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set after the end of the pseudo game, it will take time to set the second stop information, making it difficult to quickly transition from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits. There is a possibility that this will become impossible. However, if the configuration is such that the second stop information is set during the execution of the pseudo game, the above concerns can be suitably resolved.

Game machine F1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. A benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit;
In a gaming machine equipped with a pseudo game execution means (pseudo game execution function of the main control device 101) that executes a pseudo game when a specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied,
When performing the pseudo game, a start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in the pseudo game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106) controls the plurality of circulation display means to start circulating display of the symbols. )and,
If the stop operation means is operated after the start control means has started the circular display of the symbols, pseudo-stop control means (main control A stop position determination processing function S1009 in a pseudo game of the device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
When the pseudo-stop control means pseudo-stops all the circular displays of the symbols on the circulation display means, the pseudo-game ending means for ending the pseudo-game (transition after all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101 are stopped) Preparation processing function S412),
Control for starting the circular display of the symbols of the circular display means that has not started the circular display of the symbols, both when the pseudo game is not executed and when the circular display of the symbols is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game. a second start control means (acceleration start processing function S607 in this game of the main control device 101, stepping motor control processing function S106),
If the stop operation means is operated after the second start control means starts the circular display of the symbols, a second stop control means (second stop control means) that controls the corresponding circulation display means to stop the circular display of the symbols; A stop position determination processing function S1009 in this game of the main control device 101, a stepping motor control processing function S106),
Stop information setting means for setting stop information (stop information for pseudo game) used when the pseudo stop control means performs control;
a second stop information setting means for setting second stop information (stop information) used when the second stop control means controls based on the lottery result of the winning combination;
A stop operation determining means (pseudo stop command confirmation function and stop command confirmation function S1008 of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is executing the circular display of the patterns is operated. and
The benefit granting means grants the benefit based on the control result by the second stop control means, and the stop information setting means determines that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the stop operation means Before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not an operation has been performed, the stop information is set in a first storage area, and the second stop information setting means is configured to cause the pseudo game execution means to execute the pseudo game. In this case, the second stop information is stored in the first storage area between the end of the pseudo game and before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized by a setting.

According to this gaming machine, when a pseudo game is executed, a game related to awarding benefits is executed after the pseudo game is executed. At this time, the stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area before the stop operation determination means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated, and the stop information used in the game related to the awarding of benefits is set in the first storage area. 2. The stop information is set in the first storage area between the end of the pseudo game and the time before the stop operation determining means starts determining whether or not the stop operation means has been operated. With this configuration, in a pseudo game, it is possible to pseudo-stop the circular display of symbols using the stop information, and in a game related to bonus awarding, it is possible to pseudo-stop the circular display of symbols using the second stop information. It becomes possible to stop it.

Further, by setting the second stop information in the first storage area where the stop information is stored, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity prepared in advance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine F2. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that the second stop information setting means rewrites the stop information set in the first storage area into the second stop information.

According to this gaming machine, when the pseudo game ends, the stop information set in the first storage area is rewritten to the second stop information. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the increase in the first storage area.

Game machine F3. In the gaming machine F1 or gaming machine F2, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that the second stop information setting means sets when the lottery result of the combination is a specific result. A gaming machine characterized by being set.

According to this gaming machine, the stop information setting means sets, as the stop information, specific second stop information that is set by the second stop information setting means when the lottery result of the winning combination is a specific result. With this configuration, it is possible to share the stop information used in the pseudo game and the second stop information used in the game related to awarding benefits, and reduce the amount of data to be prepared in advance. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Game machine F4. In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the stop information setting means is configured such that when the pseudo game execution means executes the pseudo game, the start control means starts controlling the plurality of circulation display means. A gaming machine characterized in that the stop information is later set in the first storage area.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop information used in the pseudo game is set in the first storage area after starting the circular display of symbols in the pseudo game. With such a configuration, it is possible to promptly start the circular display of symbols when executing a pseudo game.

Game machine F5. In any of the game machines F1 to F4, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation. In this case, a pseudo game second ending means (pseudo game flag clearing function S1004 during rotation of all reels 42L, 42M, 42R of the main control device 101) is provided to end the pseudo game, and control by the pseudo game second ending means is provided. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a simulating game is performed, the simulative game ends without a simulative stop of the cyclical display of the symbols on the cyclical display means.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific operation means is operated while all of the circulation display means are displaying the symbols in circulation, the pseudo game is played without the circulation display of the symbols in the circulation display means being stopped in a pseudo manner. finish. With this configuration, it becomes possible to perform control by the second stop control means without undergoing control by the pseudo stop control means or the second start control means. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information by using the time required for control by the pseudo-stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer necessary. As a result, even in the case where the second stop information is set after the pseudo game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits.

Game machine F6. In any of the game machines F1 to F5, the pseudo game execution means is operated when the specific operation means (settlement switch 59) is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of the symbols. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a pseudo-game third ending means for ending the pseudo-game without pseudo-stopping the circulating display of the symbols of the circulating display means that is performing the circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific operation means is operated in a situation where at least one circulation display means has pseudo-stopped the circulation display of symbols, the circulation display of the symbols of the circulation display means that is performing the circulation display of the symbols is displayed. To finish a pseudo game without causing a pseudo stop. With this configuration, at least the circulation display means that displays the patterns in circulation can be controlled by the second stop control means without being controlled by the pseudo stop control means or the second start control means. becomes. Then, it becomes possible to set the second stop information by using the time required for control by the pseudo-stop control means and the second start control means, which are no longer necessary. As a result, even in the case where the second stop information is set after the pseudo game ends, it is possible to quickly shift from the pseudo game to the game related to awarding benefits.

Note that the gaming machine group A to the gaming machine group C may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group D to gaming machine F group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group A to gaming machine C group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine G1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
a stop operation determining means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays the patterns in circulation is operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is performing the circular display of the pattern is operated, the stop operation means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means A stop position determining means (stop symbol number determining function S2305 of the main controller 101) that determines the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures when the circulation display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means; (stepping motor control process S106 of main controller 101),
The stop operation determining means is operated from the time when the stop position determining means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in a cycle. The apparatus is configured such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing circulation display of the patterns is operated;
Based on the fact that the stop position determining means has determined all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, a standby processing execution means (100 msec of the main controller 101) performs a standby process of waiting for a predetermined time (100 msec). A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a standby function (S2210).

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays symbols in circulation is operated, and when the stop operation means is operated, the corresponding circulation display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. When the circulation display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the circulation display of the pictures is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position after the stop position determination means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in circulation. The configuration is such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing a circulation display of pictures is operated. With this configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the circulating display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game by increasing the operability of the stop operation means.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the operation of other stop operation means is determined without waiting for the cyclical display of symbols to stop, for example, the next game round can be started in a situation where the cyclical display of symbols has not stopped. New problems may arise, such as Therefore, this gaming machine is configured to perform a standby process of waiting for a predetermined period of time based on the stop position determining means having determined all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means. With this configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the circulation display of all the pictures is stopped while the standby process is being performed, and it is possible to suitably eliminate the above-mentioned concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine G2. The gaming machine G1 includes stop position determining means (stop confirmation function S2204 of the main controller 101) for determining whether all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. A game characterized in that the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, the stop position determining means is provided for determining whether or not all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, and the standby processing execution means is provided with the stop position determining means. A standby process is performed after determining that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time spent waiting in the standby process, and even if the configuration is configured to perform the standby process, it will take a long time until the next game round can be started. This makes it possible to prevent delays.

Game machine G3. In the game machine G2, the stop position determining means can determine, as the stop position, a position different from the circulating display position of the circulating display means when the stop operation determining means determines that the stop operation means has been operated. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration.

According to this gaming machine, the circular display of symbols may not be stopped immediately when the stop operation means is operated. In such a configuration, since the time from when the stop operation means is operated to when the circulation display of the images on the corresponding circulation display means stops, the standby process is performed in consideration of the time. In this case, there is a concern that it may take a long time until the next game round can be started. However, when this configuration is applied to the gaming machine G2, it becomes possible to set the waiting time in the standby process without considering the time required for the circulation display means to reach the stop position. It becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine G4. In the gaming machine G2 or gaming machine G3, when the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, all of the stop operation means are operated. The standby processing execution means includes a stop operation second determination means (operation completion confirmation function S2206 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not the stop operation has been completed. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after determining that all the machines are not operated.

According to this gaming machine, when the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, it is determined whether or not all of the stop operation means have been operated. The apparatus includes a stop operation second determination means for determining, and the standby processing execution means performs the standby process after the stop operation second determination means determines that all of the stop operation means are not operated. By adopting such a configuration, even if the configuration performs standby processing, it is possible to equalize the time required until the next game round can be started, and the next game round can be started. It becomes possible to improve the operability when For example, the standby process may be performed after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, without providing the second stop operation determining means. It is possible. However, in such a configuration, depending on whether the timing at which the player finishes operating all the stop operation means is after the end of the standby process or during the standby process, the next This is because the time required until it becomes possible to start a game round will change. If the time required to start the next game round changes, even if the player performs an operation to start the next game round, an event may occur in which the operation is not accepted. This is because the operability when starting the next game round is reduced.

Game machine G5. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the privilege granting means awards the privilege.

According to this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the bonus granting means grants a bonus. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which a privilege is given in a situation where the circular display of the symbols has not stopped.

Game machine G6. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, a winning determination means (payout determination processing function of the main control device 101 ), wherein the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing before the entered award determining means performs the entered award determination.

According to this gaming machine, a standby process is performed before the winning determination means makes a winning determination. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration from becoming complicated and to create a situation where all the circular display of the patterns is stopped while the standby process is being performed.

Game machine G7. In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines G1 to G6, if the lottery result of the combination is a specified result (push order bell winning), the stop operation means is activated by the specified operating method (operation that can establish a bell winning). the plurality of cyclic display means so that a specified winning (bell winning) is established when the stop operation means is operated in a manner other than the specified operating method; A stop control means (stop control processing function S2011 of the main control device 101) to control, and an operation method informing means (instruction monitor, payout A game machine characterized by comprising: a number display section 62).

According to this gaming machine, when the winning combination result is a prescribed result, the prescribed operating method may be notified by the operation method notification means. At this time, if the stop operation means is operated in the specified operation method, a specified winning can be established. By applying the configuration of any of the game machines G1 to G6 in this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a player unintentionally operates the stop operation means in an operation method other than the prescribed operation method. It becomes possible.

Game machine G8. The above-mentioned gaming machine G7 includes a notification control means (main control device 101) that controls the operation method notification means, and when the notification control means causes the operation method notification means to notify the specified operation method, the notification control means stops the operation method. After the position determination means determines the stop positions of all of the plurality of circulation display means, the notification by the operation method notification means is terminated, and the standby processing execution means causes the notification control means to terminate the notification by the operation method notification means. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after the game is finished.

According to this gaming machine, when the operation method notification means reports the prescribed operation method, the notification by the operation method notification means ends after the stop position determination means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, After that, standby processing is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly terminate the notification by the operation method notification means and shorten the waiting time in the standby process.

Game machine G9. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, there is a normal processing execution means (main controller 101) that starts up when the power is turned on and repeatedly performs a series of normal processing, and a normal processing execution means (main controller 101) that periodically interrupts the normal processing. Interrupt processing execution means (main controller 101) that performs interrupt processing, and the normal processing execution means includes the stop operation determination means, the stop position determination means, and the standby processing execution means. , the interrupt processing execution means has the stopping means, and the normal processing execution means is configured to stop a predetermined cyclic display means in a situation where the stop position determining means has not determined the stop positions of the plurality of cyclic display means. A game machine characterized in that the game machine is equipped with means for determining whether or not the predetermined circulation display means has reached the stop position determined by the stop position determining means when the stop position is determined.

According to this gaming machine, in the normal processing that is started and repeatedly performed when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays the symbols in circulation is operated; When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is displaying the patterns in circulation is operated, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position of the circulation display means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means. A process of determining is performed. On the other hand, in normal processing, when the stop position determination means determines the stop position of a predetermined circulation display means in a situation where the stop positions of a plurality of circulation display means have not been determined, the stop position determination means No determination is made as to whether or not the determined stop position has been reached. With this configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the circulating display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop.

Game machine G10. In any of the gaming machines G1 to G9, the circulation display means includes a rotating body (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) that rotates in a circumferential direction and has a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction; A gaming machine comprising: a driving means (stepping motor) for driving a rotating body.

According to this gaming machine, the circulating display means includes a rotating body that circulates in a circumferential direction and has a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction, and a driving means that drives the rotating body. In such a configuration, when the driving of the driving means is stopped, there is a possibility that the rotating body does not immediately complete its rotation and swings. However, if the configuration is such that a standby process is performed in which the device waits for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to end the swinging of the orbiting body while the standby process is being performed.

Game machine H1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls under the main control means,
The main control means is
a stop operation determining means (stop command confirmation function S2201 of the main controller 101) that determines whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays the patterns in circulation is operated;
When the stop operation determination means determines that the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that is performing the circular display of the pattern is operated, the stop operation means corresponding to the stop operation means determined by the stop operation determination means A stop position determining means (stop symbol number determining function S2305 of the main controller 101) that determines the stop position;
Stop means for stopping the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures when the circulation display means that is carrying out the circular display of the pictures reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determining means; (stepping motor control process S106 of main controller 101),
The stop operation determining means is operated from the time when the stop position determining means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in a cycle. The apparatus is configured such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing circulation display of the patterns is operated;
After the stop position determining means determines the stop positions of all of the plurality of circulation display means, stopping for determining whether all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. position determination means (stop confirmation function S2204 of main controller 101);
When the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, first information (all reels stopped complete) indicating the determination result of the stop position determining means a first transmitting means (all reel stop completion command transmitting function S2205 of the main controller 101) for transmitting a command) to the slave control means;
Stop operation second determination means (operation end confirmation function S2206 of main controller 101) that determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determination means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means. and,
When the second stop operation determining means determines that none of the stop operation means is operated, it sends second information (operation end command) indicating the determination result of the second stop operation determining means to the slave control means. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second transmitting means (operation end command transmitting function S2207 of main control device 101).

According to this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means corresponding to the circulation display means that displays symbols in circulation is operated, and when the stop operation means is operated, the corresponding circulation display is performed. Determine the stopping position of the means. When the circulation display means reaches the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, the circulation display of the pictures is stopped. Here, the stop operation determination means determines the stop position after the stop position determination means determines the stop position until before the stop means stops the circular display of the pictures of the circular display means that is displaying the pictures in circulation. The configuration is such that it can be determined whether or not a stop operation means corresponding to another circulation display means that is performing a circulation display of pictures is operated. With this configuration, the player can operate other stop operation means without waiting for the circulating display of the symbols on the circulation display means corresponding to the operated stop operation means to stop. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game by increasing the operability of the stop operation means.

On the other hand, if the configuration is such that the operation of other stop operation means is determined without waiting for the cyclical display of the symbols to stop, for example, when the operations of all the stop operation means are completed, for example, the operation of the second stop operation means is The cyclical display of the pictures of the cyclic display means that determined the stop position has not been completed, or the cyclic display of the pictures of all the cyclic display means has been completed, but the operation of at least one stop operation means has not been completed. New problems such as these may arise. If the above-mentioned problem occurs, a problem will arise in the control performed by the slave control means. Therefore, in this gaming machine, on the main control means side, after the stop position determining means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, all of the plurality of circulation display means are set to the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. If it is determined that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means, first information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the slave control means. . Further, on the main control means side, after the stop position determining means determines all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, it is determined whether or not the stop operation means is operated, and if none of the stop operation means is operated. When the determination is made, the second information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the slave control means. With this configuration, the slave control means can perform control according to the circulation display status of the symbols by receiving the first information, and can control the operation status of the stop operation means by receiving the second information. It becomes possible to perform control according to the As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine H2. The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that the second transmitting means transmits the second information after the first transmitting means transmits the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the second information is transmitted after the first information is transmitted. With this configuration, the slave control means performs control in accordance with the fact that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and then all operations of the stop operation means are completed. It becomes possible to perform control according to what has happened. Furthermore, since the main control means is equipped with the stop position determining means, the maximum time required from when the stop position determining means determines the stop position until the circulation display means actually reaches the stop position is It can be grasped or predicted by the means. On the other hand, the time required until all of the stop operation means are not operated depends on the player's operations, and therefore cannot be grasped or predicted by the main control means. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the second information is transmitted after transmitting the first information, for example, the timing when all of the plurality of cyclic display means have finished cyclically displaying the picture, and the slave control means receives the first information. It becomes possible to reduce the deviation that occurs between the timing of performing control based on .

Game machine H3. In the gaming machine H2, the stop operation second determining means performs the stop operation after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. A gaming machine characterized by determining whether or not a means is operated.

According to this gaming machine, the second stop operation determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the stop position determining means determines that all of the plurality of circulating display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determining means. Determine. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine H4. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the stop operation second determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmitting means transmits the first information.

According to this gaming machine, the stop operation second determining means determines whether or not the stop operation means is operated after the first transmitting means transmits the first information. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the slave control means to quickly grasp that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop position determined by the stop position determination means, and all of the plurality of circulation display means It is possible to reduce the gap that occurs between the timing at which the circular display of the pictures ends and the timing at which the slave control means performs control based on reception of the first information.

Game machine H5. In any of the gaming machines H2 to H4, the slave control means controls whether, when a specific condition (additional lottery winning) is satisfied, or when all of the plurality of circulating display means have finished circulating the symbols. , a performance control means (display control device 81) that controls the auxiliary performance means (speaker 64, auxiliary display section 65) to perform a different auxiliary performance (additional notification performance) when all operations of the stop operation means are completed; A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with an additional notification processing function (additional notification processing function).

According to this gaming machine, the slave control means determines when a specific condition is satisfied, when all of the plurality of circulation display means have finished circulating the symbols, and when all operations of the stop operation means have finished. The auxiliary performance means is controlled to execute different auxiliary performances. In such a configuration, depending on which occurs first: when all of the plurality of circulation display means have finished circulating the patterns, or when all the operations of the stop operation means have finished, for example, the assistance that has been prepared may be activated. Problems may arise, such as one of the performances becoming impossible to execute, or the processing configuration of the performance control means becoming complicated and the storage capacity increasing. However, the main control means transmits first information indicating that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means, and also indicates that all of the stop operation means are not operated. By transmitting the second information indicating that the slave control means has received the first information, the slave control means can grasp that all of the plurality of circulation display means have finished the circulation display of the symbols, By receiving this, it is possible to know that all operations of the stop operation means have been completed. Moreover, since the main control means transmits the second information after transmitting the first information, the slave control means performs control to execute a predetermined auxiliary effect based on the reception of the first information, and then transmits the second information. Based on the reception, control may be performed to execute an auxiliary performance different from the predetermined auxiliary performance. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate each of the above concerns.

Game machine H6. In the gaming machine H5, the performance control means controls the auxiliary performance means to execute a first auxiliary performance (third notification sound) when the specific condition is satisfied and when the first information is received. The gaming machine is characterized in that the auxiliary performance means is controlled to execute a second auxiliary performance (notification of the number of additional coins) when the second information is received.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first auxiliary performance is executed when the first information is received, and the second auxiliary performance is executed when the second information is received. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which one of the first auxiliary performance and the second auxiliary performance that has been prepared cannot be performed.

Game machine H7. The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that the first auxiliary performance and the second auxiliary performance are executed by different devices.

According to this gaming machine, the first auxiliary performance and the second auxiliary performance are executed by different devices. With this configuration, even if the interval between receiving the first information and receiving the second information is short, it is possible to reliably execute the first auxiliary performance. .

Game machine H8. In any of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the main control means may be configured to control the main control means for a predetermined period of time ( 100msec) standby processing execution means (100msec standby function S2210 of the main controller 101), the standby processing execution means is configured such that the stop position determination means indicates that all of the plurality of circulation display means are stopped. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after determining that the stop position determined by the position determining means has been reached.

According to this gaming machine, based on the stop position determining means determining all the stop positions of the plurality of circulation display means, a standby process is performed in which the stop position determining means waits for a predetermined period of time. With this configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which all the cyclic display of symbols is stopped while the standby process is being performed, and for example, it is possible to start the next game even when the cyclic display of symbols has not stopped. This makes it possible to avoid new problems such as

Further, the standby processing execution means performs the standby processing after the stop position determination means determines that all of the plurality of circulation display means have reached the stop positions determined by the stop position determination means. With this configuration, it is possible to shorten the time spent waiting in the standby process, and even if the configuration is configured to perform the standby process, it will take a long time until the next game round can be started. This makes it possible to prevent delays.

Game machine H9. In the gaming machine H8, the standby processing execution means transmits the second information to the slave control means after the first transmission means transmits the first information to the slave control means. A game machine characterized in that the standby process is performed after transmitting the data to the means.

According to this gaming machine, the standby processing execution means, after the first transmission means transmits the first information to the slave control means and after the second transmission means transmits the second information to the slave control means, Perform standby processing. With such a configuration, there is no difference between the timing when all of the plurality of circulation display means finish circulating the patterns and the timing when the slave control means performs control based on reception of the first information. It is possible to reduce the gap that occurs between the timing at which the player finishes operating the stop operation means and the timing at which the slave control means performs control based on reception of the second information. Further, since the time to wait in the standby process can be set in consideration of the time required for transmitting the first information, etc., it is possible to shorten the time to wait in the standby process.

Note that the game machine G group and the game machine H group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group A to gaming machine F group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group G and the gaming machine H group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine I1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in accordance with signals from the main control means,
The main control means is
Specific information storage means (ROM 105) that stores specific information (rotation start header information, etc.) in advance;
a storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) that stores different information depending on whether it is a specific game (pseudo game) or not the specific game;
a command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) that transmits a command to the slave control means;
A command creation means (header creation function S3002, body creation function S3005, footer creation function S3006, etc.) for creating the command,
The command creation means may include a prescribed command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates a prescribed command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, a prescribed command is created by calculating pre-stored specific information and information stored in a storage area where different information is stored depending on whether or not it is a specific game. . With this configuration, the slave control means can grasp whether or not it is a specific game through the prescribed command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the slave control means to perform control depending on whether or not it is a specific game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, with this configuration, it is no longer necessary to store in advance commands to be sent when a specific game is being played and commands to be sent when the game is not a specific game, so it is possible to reduce the amount of data. becomes.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a command to be sent when the game is a specific game and a command to be sent when the game is not a specific game are stored in advance, it is possible to determine whether the game is a specific game or not when sending a command. It becomes necessary to perform determination processing, and the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include whether or not it is a specific game, so the above processing is unnecessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine I2. In the above gaming machine I1, the specified command creation means generates the specified information and the information stored in the storage area, both in the case of the specific game and in the case of not the specific game. A game machine characterized in that a prescribed command is created by calculating .

According to this gaming machine, the specified command is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area, both in the case of a specific game and in the case of a non-specific game. . With such a configuration, when transmitting a command, there is no need for processing to determine whether or not it is a specific game, and by simplifying the processing configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data.

Game machine I3. The gaming machine I1 or I2, wherein the specified command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With this configuration, it becomes possible to include information indicating whether or not it is a specific game in the header. As a result, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine I4. The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes information indicating whether or not it is a specific game, and the header is contained in one byte, so that when receiving the header, the slave control means collects more information. It becomes possible to understand the

Game machine I5. In the gaming machine I3 or gaming machine I4, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information that indicates the command type, and whether or not the game is the specific game. and a specific game storage bit for storing information indicating the type of game, and the specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine with special features.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information that indicates the command type, and information that indicates whether or not it is a specific game. A specific game storage bit is provided, and the specific game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether or not it is a specific game in bits that were conventionally considered unused, and the command sent from the main control means to the slave control means can be It becomes possible to suitably suppress redundancy.

Game machine I6. The above-mentioned gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific game storage bit is an unused area. With such a configuration, when a header is created by calculating specific information and information stored in the storage area, it is possible to avoid changes in information indicating the command type, etc. .

Game machine I7. In any of the gaming machines I3 to I6, the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, a header including information indicating whether or not it is a specific game is created by calculating header information including information indicating the command type and information stored in the storage area. Ru. With this configuration, there is no need to store in advance the header of the command to be sent when the game is a specific game, and the header of the command to be sent when the game is not a specific game, so the amount of data can be reduced. It becomes possible to achieve this goal.

Game machine I8. In any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, when the first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is satisfied, a first execution means ( Pseudo game flag set function S504) and when a second specific condition (pseudo game end) is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage area is changed to second information (00H). A second execution means (pseudo game flag clear function S611), a confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and a confirmation means for confirming the first information in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: specific game execution means (pseudo game execution function) that executes the specific game when it is confirmed that the specific game is stored.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is met, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the storage area is is changed to the second information. Then, when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area, a specific game is executed. In this way, the information stored in the storage area is used not only for creating a prescribed command but also for determining whether or not to execute a specific game, thereby suppressing the increase in storage capacity. becomes possible.

Game machine I9. In any of the gaming machines I1 to I8, when information indicating the specific game is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the specific game is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that, when information indicating that the game is not played is stored, the first signal is no longer output to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when information indicating that the game is a specific game is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and information indicating that the game is not a specific game is stored in the storage area. In this case, the first signal is no longer output to the outside of the gaming machine. With this configuration, the information stored in the storage area has a function as information used when creating a prescribed command and a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. , it becomes possible to grant. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine I10. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the specific game is a pseudo game.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to have the slave control means grasp whether or not it is a pseudo game through a prescribed command.

Game machine I11. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines I1 to I9, the specific game is a game in a specific gaming state.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make the slave control means grasp whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state through the prescribed command.

Game machine J1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in accordance with signals from the main control means,
The main control means is
If the first specific condition (additional lottery win, pseudo game lottery win) is satisfied, the first execution means (pseudo game flag set function S504) stores the first information (40H) in the storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) and,
If the second specific condition (pseudo game end) is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the second execution means (pseudo game flag clear) changes the information stored in the storage area to second information (00H). Function S611) and
Confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.);
Different controls are performed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. A control execution means (pseudo game execution function) to execute,
A gaming machine comprising: setting means for setting correspondence information (rotation start header) using at least part of the information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is met, the first information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is met after the first specific condition is met, the information stored in the storage area is is changed to the second information. Different controls are executed when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area. . Furthermore, correspondence information is set using at least part of the information stored in the storage area. In this way, by using a configuration in which the information stored in the storage area is used not only for judgment when executing control but also for setting correspondence information, it is possible to suppress the increase in storage capacity. Become.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to store other data related to the game, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine J2. In the gaming machine J1, the control execution means executes a specific game (pseudo game) when the confirmation means confirms that the first information is stored in the storage area; A gaming machine characterized in that when it is confirmed that the second information is stored in a storage area, the specific game is not executed.

According to this gaming machine, when it is confirmed that the first information is stored in the storage area, a specific game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific game is executed. game is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific game based on the information stored in the storage area, and it is also possible to set corresponding information corresponding to whether or not to execute a specific game. .

Game machine J3. In the gaming machine J1 or gaming machine J2, a specific information storage means (ROM 105) that stores specific information (rotation start header information, etc.) in advance, and a command transmission means (command transmission processing) that transmits a command to the slave control means. 3, etc.), and the setting means includes a prescribed command creation means (header creation) that creates a prescribed command (stop header, etc.) by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized by having a function S3002, etc.).

According to this gaming machine, the prescribed command is executed by calculating the specific information stored in advance and the information stored in the storage area where different information is stored depending on whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied. is created. With this configuration, the slave control means can grasp whether each specific condition is satisfied through the specified command.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to cause the slave control means to perform control depending on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a configuration, there is no need to store in advance a command to be sent when the first information is stored and a command to be sent when the second information is stored, so the amount of data This makes it possible to reduce the

Furthermore, in a configuration in which a command to be transmitted when the first information is stored and a command to be transmitted when the second information is stored are stored in advance, a confirmation means is provided when transmitting the command. It becomes necessary to perform confirmation processing using the method, and the processing configuration becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this gaming machine, if a prescribed command is created, the prescribed command will include whether the first information or the second information is stored, so the above-mentioned confirmation process is not necessary. From this point of view as well, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine J4. In the above gaming machine J3, the prescribed command creation means is configured to: A gaming machine characterized in that a prescribed command is created by calculating the specific information and information stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, in both the case where the first information is stored in the storage area and the case where the second information is stored in the storage area, the specific information and the information stored in the storage area are A prescribed command is created by calculating the information. With this configuration, when transmitting a command, there is no need to process to determine whether the first information or the second information is stored in the storage area, and by simplifying the processing configuration, the amount of data can be reduced. It becomes possible to aim at reduction.

Game machine J5. The gaming machine J3 or J4, wherein the specified command is a header.

According to this gaming machine, the header is created by calculating the specific information and the information stored in the storage area. With this configuration, it is possible to include information indicating whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied in the header. As a result, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine J6. The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

According to this gaming machine, since the header includes information indicating whether the first specific condition and the second specific condition are satisfied and is contained in one byte, the slave control means, when receiving the header, It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine J7. In the gaming machine J5 or gaming machine J6, the header includes a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit storing information indicating the command type, the first specific condition and the first specific condition. 2. A specific condition storage bit that stores information indicating whether or not a specific condition is met, and the specific condition storage bit is located at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit storing information indicating the command type, and whether or not the first specific condition and the second specific condition are met. The specific condition storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether each specific condition is met in bits that were conventionally considered unused, and the commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means become redundant. This makes it possible to suitably suppress this.

Game machine J8. The gaming machine J7 is characterized in that the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the specific condition storage bit is an unused area. With such a configuration, when a header is created by calculating specific information and information stored in the storage area, it is possible to avoid changes in information indicating the command type, etc. .

Game machine J9. In any of the gaming machines J5 to J8, the specific information is header information including information indicating a command type.

According to this gaming machine, a header including information indicating whether each specific condition is satisfied is created by calculating header information including information indicating the command type and information stored in the storage area. With this configuration, there is no need to store in advance a header to be sent when the first information is stored and a header to be sent when the second information is stored, so the amount of data can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the

Game machine J10. In any of the gaming machines J1 to J9, the setting means outputs a first signal to the outside of the gaming machine when the first information is stored in the storage area, and outputs the first signal to the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that when information is stored, the first signal is not outputted to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and when the second information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine. It will no longer be output. With this configuration, the information stored in the storage area is given the function of information used when executing control and the function of information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine. It becomes possible to do so. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
A gaming machine comprising a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls in accordance with signals from the main control means,
The main control means is
a command transmission means (command transmission processing 3, etc.) that transmits a command to the slave control means;
Information storage means (ROM 105) that stores in advance first command information (stop header information, etc.) transmitted to the slave control means in the case of a first game (main game);
When executing a second game (pseudo game) different from the first game, a storage area (pseudo game flag storage area) for storing second game information (40H);
If it is the second game, a command creation means (header creation function S3002, etc.) that creates second command information (stop header, etc.) by calculating the first command information and the second game information; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, the first command information to be sent to the slave control means in the case of the first game is stored in advance, and when the second game different from the first game is executed, the first command information is stored in the memory. Second game information is stored in the area. In the case of the second game, second command information is created by calculating the first command information and the second game information. With this configuration, it becomes possible to transmit the second command information to the slave control means in the case of the second game, and the second command information can be transmitted depending on whether it is the first game or the second game. It becomes possible to cause the slave control means to carry out the control according to the present invention.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in such a configuration, since it is not necessary to previously store the second command information in the main control means, it is possible to reduce the amount of data and suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K2. The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that when the first game is executed, first game information (00H) is stored in the storage area.

According to this gaming machine, when executing the first game, the first game information is stored in the storage area. With this configuration, there is no need to separately provide a storage area for storing the first game information, so it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K3. In the gaming machine K2, when a first specific condition (additional lottery winning, pseudo game lottery winning) is satisfied, a first execution means (pseudo game flag setting function S504) for storing the second gaming information in the storage area; , if a second specific condition (pseudo game end) is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, a second execution means (pseudo game flag clear) that changes the information stored in the storage area to the first game information function S611), a confirmation means for confirming the information stored in the storage area (pseudo game flag confirmation function S2903, etc.), and the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area. In this case, when the first game execution means (main game execution function) that executes the first game and the confirmation means confirm that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the second game is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second game execution means (pseudo game execution function) for executing.

According to this gaming machine, when the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area, and when the second specific condition is satisfied after the first specific condition is satisfied, the second game information is stored in the storage area. The information is changed to first game information. When the confirmation means confirms that the first game information is stored in the storage area, the first game is executed, and when the confirmation means confirms that the second game information is stored in the storage area, the first game information is stored in the storage area. 2 games are executed. In this way, by configuring the information stored in the storage area to be used not only for creating the second command information but also for determining whether to execute the first game or the second game, the storage capacity can be increased. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in .

Game machine K4. In the game machine K2 or K3, the command creation means stores the first command information and the storage area in both the first game and the second game. A game machine that creates command information by calculating stored game information.

According to this gaming machine, in both the first game and the second game, the command is executed by calculating the first command information and the game information stored in the storage area. Create information. By adopting such a configuration, when transmitting a command, there is no need for processing to determine whether it is the first game or the second game, and the amount of data can be reduced by simplifying the processing configuration. It becomes possible.

Game machine K5. In the game machine K4, when the command creation means calculates the first game information, the first command information, and the first game information, the calculation result does not change from the first command information. A game machine characterized by having the following configuration.

According to this gaming machine, when the first command information and the first game information are calculated, the result of the calculation remains the first command information. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by simplifying the processing configuration.

Game machine K6. A gaming machine characterized in that the first command information is a header in any of the gaming machines K1 to K5.

According to this gaming machine, by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to create the second command information as a header, and the header includes the first game and the second game information. It becomes possible to include information indicating which one. As a result, it is possible to suppress redundancy of commands sent from the main control means to the slave control means.

Game machine K7. The gaming machine K6 is characterized in that the header is contained in one byte.

According to this gaming machine, the header includes information indicating whether the game is the first game or the second game, and the header is contained in one byte, so that when the slave control means receives the header, It becomes possible to grasp more information.

Game machine K8. In the gaming machine K6 or gaming machine K7, the header includes a header identification bit storing information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit storing information indicating the command type, the first game and the second game machine. A game storage bit that stores information indicating which game it is, and the game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, the header includes a header identification bit that stores information indicating that it is a header, a type storage bit that stores information that indicates the command type, and whether it is the first game or the second game. The game storage bit is provided at a position lower than the header identification bit and higher than the type storage bit. With this configuration, it becomes possible to store information indicating whether the game is a first game or a second game in a bit that would have been unused in the past, and the information is transmitted from the main control means to the slave control means. It becomes possible to suitably suppress redundancy of transmitted commands.

Game machine K9. The above-mentioned gaming machine K8 is characterized in that the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the game storage bit is an unused area.

According to this gaming machine, the storage area is made up of the same bytes as the header, and the area other than the position corresponding to the game storage bit is an unused area. With this configuration, when creating a header by calculating the first command information and the second game information, it is possible to avoid changes in information indicating the command type, etc.

Game machine K10. In any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, when the second gaming information is stored in the storage area, a first signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine, and the second gaming information is stored in the storage area. A gaming machine characterized in that the first signal is not outputted to the outside of the gaming machine if the gaming machine is not operated.

According to this gaming machine, when the second game information is stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the game machine, and when the second game information is not stored in the storage area, the first signal is output to the outside of the game machine. 1 signal is no longer output. With this configuration, the second game information has a function as information used when creating the second command information, a function as information used when outputting the first signal to the outside of the gaming machine, It becomes possible to grant. As a result, it becomes possible to effectively utilize the storage area, and it becomes possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine K11. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines K1 to K10, the second game is a pseudo game, and the first game is a game that is not the pseudo game.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make the slave control means grasp whether or not it is a pseudo game through the first command information and the second command information.

Game machine K12. In any of the gaming machines K1 to K10, the second game is a game in a specific gaming state, and the first game is a game in a gaming state different from the specific gaming state. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, it is possible to make the slave control means grasp whether or not the game is in a specific gaming state through the first command information and the second command information.

Note that the gaming machine group I to the gaming machine group K may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group I to gaming machine K group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine group A to gaming machine H group, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved.

Game machine L1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
Comprising a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that displays predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the production switch 67),
When the first effect is executed, the predetermined operation becomes valid if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is satisfied after the start of the specific effect; A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operation may be valid even if a specific condition is not satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, even if the first effect is executed, it is possible to display predetermined information by performing a predetermined operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which the predetermined information is not displayed even if a predetermined operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player feels irritated.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid if a specific condition is satisfied after the start of the specific performance, and cases where the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied after the start of the specific performance. Since the configuration is such that there are certain cases, it is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective, for example, depending on the start timing of a specific performance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the opportunity to display predetermined information at a timing desired by the player, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine L2. The gaming machine L1 is characterized in that the specific condition includes that a specific time (approximately 5 seconds) has elapsed since the specific effect was started.

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, there are cases in which the predetermined operation becomes valid after a specific time has elapsed after the start of the specific performance, and cases in which the predetermined operation is activated before the specific time has elapsed after the start of the specific performance. There are cases where it is valid. With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective, for example, depending on the start timing of a specific performance.

Game machine L3. The above-mentioned gaming machine L2 is characterized in that the specific performance is configured such that the specific result (presence or absence of a top-up) is notified until a second specific time (approximately 2 seconds) shorter than the specific time elapses. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the specific performance, the specific result is announced until the second specific time period, which is shorter than the specific time period, has elapsed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance that a predetermined operation becomes effective before notifying a specific result.

Game machine L4. In the gaming machine L3, if a second specific condition (first timer 0, completion flag present) is satisfied after the start of the specific performance, the predetermined operation is valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. , wherein the second specific condition includes that the second specific time period elapses after starting the specific effect.

According to this gaming machine, if the second specific condition including elapse of the second specific time after starting the specific performance is satisfied, the predetermined operation becomes valid even if the specific condition is not satisfied. With this configuration, the specific result can be notified regardless of whether the specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation is valid or the second specific condition is satisfied and the predetermined operation is valid. After that, it becomes possible to make the predetermined operation valid.

Game machine L5. The gaming machine L3 or L4, wherein the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first performance is executed but also when displaying predetermined information. In a configuration in which a specific performance is started based on the operation of the first operating means, there is a possibility that the player operates the first operating means again after notification of the specific result in hopes of further development of the performance. Therefore, by configuring the specific effect to notify the specific result until the second specific time period, which is shorter than the specific time period, has elapsed, the chances of displaying specific information in a situation that the player did not intend to occur are reduced. It becomes possible to do so.

Game machine L6. The gaming machine L5 is characterized in that the specific time is twice or more the second specific time.

According to this gaming machine, since the specific time is set to be more than twice the second specific time, if the player operates the first operating means again in anticipation of further development of the performance after notification of the specific result, etc. This makes it possible to avoid displaying predetermined information.

Game machine L7. When the first effect is executed in any of the gaming machines L1 to L6, the elapsed time after the specified condition (operation end command reception) is established is the first specified time (approximately 10 seconds). If the elapsed time since the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time (approximately 2 seconds) after the specified effect has been reached, the elapsed time since the start of the specific effect is longer than the second specified time. The predetermined operation becomes effective when a long third predetermined time (approximately 5 seconds) is reached, and the predetermined condition is satisfied after the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance reaches the second predetermined time. The predetermined operation is characterized in that the predetermined operation becomes effective when the elapsed time since the predetermined condition is met becomes the first predetermined time, and the elapsed time since the predetermined condition is met becomes the first predetermined time. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, when the first effect is executed, after the elapsed time since the specified condition is established reaches the first specified time, the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the second specified time. When the specified time has elapsed, the predetermined operation becomes valid when the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect reaches the third specified time, which is longer than the second specified time, and the elapsed time from the start of the specific effect becomes effective. If after becoming the second specified time, the elapsed time since the specified condition was met becomes the first specified time, and if the elapsed time after the specified condition was satisfied becomes the first specified time, The predetermined operation becomes valid. With this configuration, it is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective according to the timing at which the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance reaches the second specified time.

Game machine L8. The gaming machine L7 is characterized in that the specified condition is satisfied when the first effect is started.

According to this gaming machine, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective is determined by the relationship between the elapsed time from the start of the first performance and the timing at which the elapsed time from the start of the specific performance becomes the second specified time. changes. Since the specific performance is started when the first operation means is operated, this configuration reduces the time required from the start of the first performance until the player operates the first operation means. It becomes possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective depending on the timing.

Game machine LL1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state),
When the first performance is executed, if a specific condition (both the first timer and the second timer are 0) is satisfied after the start of the specific performance, the state shifts to the customer waiting state; A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine may shift to the customer waiting state even if a specific condition is not satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, even when the first effect is executed, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of an event in which the state does not shift to a customer waiting state when the first performance is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, there are cases where the state shifts to the customer waiting state if a specific condition is met after the start of the specific performance, and cases where the state shifts to the customer wait state even if the specific condition is not satisfied after the start of the specific performance. Since the configuration is such that the timing of transition to the customer waiting state can be changed depending on, for example, the start timing of a specific performance, etc.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the chances of transitioning to the customer waiting state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the configurations described in gaming machines L2 to L8 above may be combined as appropriate by changing the description of "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state", and when combined, Even if there is, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Gaming machine M1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means includes a specific command transmitting means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means is
a first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) that performs control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
a predetermined information control means (menu processing function S3606) that performs control to display predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the production switch 67);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, an enabling means for validating the subsequent predetermined operation (ends the press effect process and performs S3603) 1. A gaming machine characterized by having the following functions:

According to this gaming machine, even if the first effect is executed, it is possible to display predetermined information by performing a predetermined operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which the predetermined information is not displayed even if a predetermined operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player feels irritated.

In addition, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation becomes valid, so the timing when the predetermined operation becomes valid can be defined by the reception timing of a specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the opportunity to display predetermined information at a timing desired by the player, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine M2. In the gaming machine M1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is performed after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a second enabling means (a function of ending the press effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603).

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation becomes valid after the specific performance has been executed. Become. With this configuration, even if the first operating means is operated after receiving the specific command, it is possible to execute the specific effect.

Gaming machine M3. In the gaming machine M1 or gaming machine M2, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the predetermined effect is executed after the specific effect has been executed. A second validation means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) is provided for validating the subsequent predetermined operation after a specified time (approximately 3 seconds) has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has not been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent performance will be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the specific performance has been executed. The predetermined operation becomes valid. With this configuration, even if the first operating means is operated after receiving the specific command, it is possible to execute the specific effect. In addition, by providing a grace period called a specified time between when the specific performance has been executed and when the predetermined operation becomes effective, the timing when the specific performance has been executed, that is, the timing when the first operation means is operated, can be adjusted. It is possible to change the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depending on the timing at which the specific command is received.

Gaming machine M4. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines M1 to M3, the predetermined operation is an operation of the first operating means.

According to this gaming machine, the first operating means is operated not only when the first performance is executed but also when displaying predetermined information. In a configuration in which a specific performance is started using the operation of the first operating means as a trigger, there is a possibility that the player operates the first operating means again after the specific performance has been executed in hopes of further development of the performance. Conceivable. Therefore, by setting the timing at which the specified operation becomes valid, such as when a specific command is received or after a specified time has elapsed, rather than the timing when a specific effect has been executed, the specified information can be made available in situations that the player did not intend. It is possible to reduce the chances of display.

Gaming machine M5. The gaming machine M4 includes a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols (symbols), and a start operation means (start lever) that is operated to start the cyclic display of the symbols. 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58), a lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs a lottery of winning combinations, and a plurality of controllers that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the symbols. The stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) and the winning symbols corresponding to the winning combinations won in the lottery of the above-mentioned combinations form a predetermined combination (combination of minor combination symbols, etc.) at the valid position (valid line). The predetermined information control means includes at least a reward giving means (such as medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101) that gives a reward to the player as a winning result based on the stoppage, and the predetermined information control means at least controls the circulation display means. A gaming machine characterized by performing control to display the predetermined information when all of the symbols have stopped circulating display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the above-described effects can be achieved in a slot machine that can display predetermined information even when a game has not started.

Gaming machine M6. In the game machine M5, the main control means sends an operation end command to the slave control means when all operations of the stop operation means to stop the circular display of the symbols are completed. A gaming machine comprising a transmitting means (operation end command transmitting function S3307), wherein the first effect control means performs control to execute the first effect based on receiving the operation end command.

According to this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all operations of the stop operation means for stopping the circular display of symbols are completed. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases where control is performed to execute a specific effect and cases where control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is enabled, thereby avoiding the occurrence of malfunctions. becomes possible.

Gaming machine M7. In the gaming machine M6, the specific command transmitting means, when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed after all operations of the stop operation means to stop the circular display of the symbols, A gaming machine characterized by transmitting the specific command.

According to this gaming machine, a specific command is transmitted when a predetermined specific time has elapsed after all operations of the stop operation means for stopping the circular display of symbols are completed. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the elapsed time after all the operations of the stop operation means to stop the circular display of the symbols are completed, and the timing when the specific effect has been executed, that is, when the first operation means was operated. It is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective depending on the timing.

Game machine M8. In the above-mentioned gaming machine M5, the main control means includes a circulation end command transmitting means (all A gaming machine comprising a reel stop completion command sending function (S3305), wherein the first performance control means performs control to execute the first performance based on receiving the circulation end command.

According to this gaming machine, the first effect is executed when all the circular displays of symbols have stopped. In such a configuration, when the first operating means is operated, there are cases where control is performed to execute a specific effect and cases where control is performed to display predetermined information. Therefore, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has already been executed when the specific command is received, the subsequent predetermined operation is enabled, thereby avoiding the occurrence of malfunctions. becomes possible.

Game machine M9. In the gaming machine M8, the specific command transmitting means transmits the specific command when a predetermined specific time (approximately 10 seconds) has elapsed since all of the circulating display means stopped circulating display of the symbols. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, a specific command is transmitted when a predetermined specific time has elapsed since the cyclical display of all the symbols stopped. With this configuration, the timing at which the predetermined operation becomes effective depends on the elapsed time after the circular display of all the symbols is completed and the timing at which the specific effect has been executed, that is, the timing at which the first operating means is operated. It becomes possible to change the

Gaming machine MM1. A main control means (main control device 101) that centrally manages the game;
a slave control means (display control device 81) that performs various controls according to signals from the main control means;
In a gaming machine equipped with a first operating means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by a player,
The main control means includes a specific command transmitting means for transmitting a specific command to the slave control means,
The slave control means is
a first effect control means (press display execution function S3504) that performs control to execute a first effect (press display) that prompts the operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect control means (result display processing function) that performs control to execute a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
Transition control means (standby processing function S3607) that performs control to transition to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state);
When the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has been executed when the specific command is received, a transition enabling means (press effect processing) that enables the transition to the customer waiting state thereafter. (a function of terminating the process and proceeding to S3603).

According to this gaming machine, even when the first effect is executed, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of an event in which the state does not shift to a customer waiting state when the first performance is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has been executed when a specific command is received, the configuration allows the transition to the customer waiting state after that, so the transition to the customer waiting state It becomes possible to define the timing of the command based on the reception timing of the specific command transmitted from the main control means.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the chances of transitioning to the customer waiting state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine MM2. In the gaming machine MM1, when the first effect is executed, if the specific effect has not been executed when the specific command is received, the process returns to the customer waiting state after the specific effect has been executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second transition enabling means (a function of terminating the press effect processing based on the second timer 0 and proceeding to S3603) that enables the transition.

According to this gaming machine, when the first performance is executed, if the specific performance has not been executed when the specific command is received, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state after the specific performance has been executed. Become something. With this configuration, even if the first operating means is operated after receiving the specific command, it is possible to execute the specific effect.

In addition, in the configurations described in gaming machines M3 to M9 above, the statement "The subsequent predetermined operation is made valid" has been changed to "The transition to the customer waiting state is then possible." They may be changed and combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Game machine N1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
Comprising a predetermined information display means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that displays predetermined information (menu screen) based on a predetermined operation (operation of the production switch 67),
When the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of a first timer after the start of the specific performance, and the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of a second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized in that there are cases where the predetermined operation is valid.

According to this gaming machine, even if the first effect is executed, it is possible to display predetermined information by performing a predetermined operation. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chance of occurrence of an event in which the predetermined information is not displayed even if a predetermined operation is performed, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player feels irritated.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific performance, and the predetermined operation is activated based on the value of the second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. Since the configuration is such that there are times when an operation is valid, it is possible to change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes valid, for example, depending on the start timing of a specific performance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the opportunity to display predetermined information at a timing desired by the player, and it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Game machine N2. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it includes an operating means (first timer operating function S3505) that operates the first timer when the first effect is started.

According to this gaming machine, the first timer is activated when the first performance is started. With this configuration, when the first performance is executed, the predetermined operation is valid based on the time elapsed since the start of the first performance, and the predetermined operation is valid based on the time elapsed since the start of the specific performance. It is possible to create a configuration in which there are cases where a predetermined operation is valid based on the above information.

Game machine N3. In the gaming machine N1 or gaming machine N2, a first confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0), and the specific performance has been executed. execution confirmation means (completion flag confirmation function S4104) for confirming whether or not the specific effect has been executed; A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration that enables effective operation.

According to this gaming machine, when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value after the specific performance has been executed, the predetermined operation becomes valid. With this configuration, when the first effect is executed, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the first operating means so that the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. , it is possible to reduce the chances of a delay between the first performance and the specific performance.

Game machine N4. In the gaming machine N3, if the specific performance has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, or if the value of the second timer reaches the second specified value (0) A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the predetermined operation is enabled.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific performance has not been executed when the value of the first timer reaches the predetermined value, the predetermined operation is determined to be valid when the value of the second timer reaches the second predetermined value. Become. With such a configuration, if the first operating means is operated so that the specific effect has been executed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific effect is executed depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. The first operating means is operated such that the specific effect is completed after the value of the first timer reaches a specified value, while having a configuration in which the length of time from when the specified operation becomes effective after the execution has been completed is changed. In this case, it becomes possible to make the length of time from when the specific performance has been executed until the predetermined operation becomes valid to be constant.

Game machine N5. A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine N4 is provided with a second operating means (second timer operating function S4212) that operates the second timer when the specific performance has been executed.

According to this gaming machine, since the second timer is configured to operate when a specific performance has been executed, the length of time from when the specific performance has been executed to when the predetermined operation becomes valid is constant. It becomes possible to do this.

Game machine N6. In the gaming machine N5, the second operating means does not operate the second timer if the specific performance is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, if the specific effect is completed before the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the second timer is not activated, and the specified performance is executed after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. When the performance has been executed, a second timer is activated. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer. This makes it possible to configure a configuration in which the system does not operate, and it becomes possible to simplify the processing configuration.

Game machine N7. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines N3 to N6, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer. may be configured such that it does not operate.

Game machine N8. The gaming machine N1 is characterized in that the second timer does not operate when the first timer operates.

According to this gaming machine, since the second timer does not operate when the first timer operates, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration and change the timing at which a predetermined operation becomes effective. .

Game machine N9. In the gaming machine N8, a confirmation means (first timer confirmation function S4103) for confirming whether the value of the first timer is a specified value (0) when the specific performance has been executed; A gaming machine comprising: second operating means for operating the second timer when the confirmation means confirms that the value of the first timer is the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, when the specific performance has been executed, it is checked whether the value of the first timer is the specified value, and if the value of the first timer is the specified value, the second timer is is activated. With this configuration, the first timer is operated until the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, and after the value of the first timer reaches the specified value, the specific performance is completed. It becomes possible to operate the second timer at the appropriate timing.

Game machine N10. The gaming machine N9 is characterized in that the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value.

According to this gaming machine, the operation of the first timer ends when the value of the first timer reaches the specified value. With this configuration, the second timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the first timer, and the first timer does not operate in a situation where a predetermined operation is enabled based on the value of the second timer. may be configured such that it does not operate.

Game machine NN1. A first operation means (effect switch 67) that can be operated by the player;
a first effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a first effect (press display) prompting operation of the first operation means;
a specific effect execution means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) that executes a specific effect (result display) when the first operation means is operated after execution of the first effect;
A transition means (display control device 81, auxiliary display section 65) for transitioning to a customer waiting state (customer waiting performance display state),
When the first performance is executed, the transition to the customer waiting state is based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific performance, and the case where the transition to the customer waiting state is based on the value of the second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a case where the gaming machine shifts to the customer waiting state.

According to this gaming machine, even when the first effect is executed, it is possible to shift to the customer waiting state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the chances of an event in which the state does not shift to a customer waiting state when the first performance is executed.

In addition, when the first performance is executed, there is a case where the customer waits state based on the value of the first timer after the start of the specific performance, and a case where the customer waits for the customer based on the value of the second timer that is activated after the start of the specific performance. Since there is a configuration in which there are cases in which the system shifts to the waiting state, it is possible to change the timing of shifting to the customer waiting state depending on, for example, the start timing of a specific performance.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to increase the chances of transitioning to the customer waiting state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the configurations described in gaming machines N2 to N10 above may be combined as appropriate by changing the description of "predetermined operation becomes effective" to "transition to customer waiting state", and when combined, Even if there is, the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Note that the gaming machine L group to the gaming machine N group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-described effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine A group to the gaming machine K group may be appropriately combined with the gaming machine L group to the gaming machine N group, and even when combined, the above effects can be achieved.

Game machine O1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
The gaming states include an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies you of the operation method for achieving a specific winning (bell winning), and a normal state (normal state) in which the instruction function does not operate. section) and,
The advantageous state has a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first gaming mode,
a first ending means (advantageous section end function S1703 to S1705 of the main controller 101) that ends the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when a first end condition (difference number of sheets 2400) is satisfied;
If a second termination condition different from the first termination condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is satisfied, a second termination means for terminating the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state. (advantageous section end function S4505 to S4507 of main controller 101);
comprising a control means (display control device 81) that performs control to display an end screen that notifies the end of the advantageous state;
When the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the control means controls to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, and A gaming machine characterized in that, when an end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in a game round in which the second end condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, there are a first ending condition and a second ending condition as ending conditions for ending an advantageous state, and when the first ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the first ending condition is satisfied. Control is performed to display an end screen in the next game round of the game round, and when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round where the second end condition is met. be exposed. In this way, by varying the game times in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine O2. In the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied when the difference in the number of coins from the base point reaches the upper limit number (2400 coins) based on the time when the number of game media decreases the most in the advantageous state. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, when the difference in the number of coins from the base point when the number of game media decreases the most in an advantageous state reaches the upper limit number, the game ends at the next game round of the game round in which the difference number reaches the upper limit number. The screen will be displayed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the advantageous state has not ended. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed in the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, but in such a configuration, the first end screen may be displayed depending on the lottery result of the combination, the operation method of the stop operation means, etc. This is because the game round in which the condition is satisfied may be shifted, and an event may occur in which the end screen is displayed over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the advantageous state has not ended.

Game machine O3. The gaming machine O2 is provided with a difference number confirmation means (difference number confirmation function S4511 of the main controller 101) for checking the difference number, and when the difference number confirmation means reaches a prescribed number (2200 pieces) smaller than the upper limit number. The gaming machine is characterized in that, when it is confirmed that the player has played the game, the first ending condition is satisfied in a subsequent game round and the advantageous state ends.

According to this gaming machine, when the differential number confirmation means confirms that the specified number of medals is smaller than the upper limit number, the first end condition is satisfied in the subsequent game round and the advantageous state ends. With this configuration, the player can play a game in an advantageous state with the goal of making the difference in the number of coins reach the specified number. As a result, even in the case of a configuration in which an upper limit is set on the number of difference sheets in an advantageous state, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play. In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to know in advance that the first end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, so the difference number confirmation means confirms that the specified number of sheets has been reached, and then the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends. It becomes possible to diversify the auxiliary effects until the first termination condition is satisfied.

Game machine O4. In the gaming machine O3, when the differential number of coins confirmation means confirms that the prescribed number of coins has been reached, control is performed to execute a continuous auxiliary effect (ending video) that continues until the game round in which the first ending condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a continuation auxiliary performance control means (ending execution processing function S4711 of the display control device 81).

According to this gaming machine, when the differential number confirmation means confirms that the specified number of medals has been reached, a continuous auxiliary performance is executed that continues until the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player by continuous auxiliary performance that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, and the player can be informed that the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends. It becomes possible to let the player play the game while feeling a sense of superiority. Furthermore, since the end screen is displayed in the next game round after the first end condition has been met, the player can play the next game round while immersing himself in the afterglow of the game. As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Game machine O5. A gaming machine characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, when the ending condition of the second gaming mode is satisfied, the second ending condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, when the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed in the game round where the end condition of the second game mode is satisfied. With this configuration, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting that the second game mode will continue, etc., and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Game machine O6. In the gaming machine O5, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the end of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine featuring:

According to this gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the end screen is displayed before the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the end screen that has been prepared to be wasted. It is also possible to configure the end screen to be displayed after the game round ends; however, in such a configuration, if the player immediately operates the start operation means to start the next game round, the end screen will be displayed. This is because it will not be possible to secure enough time to display the information.

Game machine O7. In the gaming machine O5 or the gaming machine O6, when the second ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, at least one cyclic display means of the game round in which the second ending condition is satisfied displays the symbols cyclically. A gaming machine characterized in that the end screen is displayed in a situation where the game machine is not stopped.

According to the present gaming machine, when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, under a situation where at least one circulation display means of the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied does not stop the circulation display of symbols. The end screen will be displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the end screen that has been prepared to be wasted. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the end screen is displayed after all the circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of symbols, but in such a configuration, the player can immediately start the next game round. This is because when the operating means is operated, it becomes impossible to secure enough time to display the end screen.

Game machine O8. Any of the gaming machines O5 to O7 is provided with a number information storage means (transfer game number counter) for storing number information related to the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, and corresponds to the number of games information. A gaming machine characterized in that a condition for ending the second gaming mode is satisfied when a certain number of games have been played.

According to this gaming machine, when the game is played the number of times corresponding to the number of times information stored in the number of times information storage means, the condition for ending the second game mode is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the end screen over a plurality of game rounds in a situation where the second game mode and the advantageous state have not ended.

Game machine O9. In the gaming machine O8, an increase lottery means (addition lottery processing function S4403 of the main control device 101) that performs an increase lottery (addition lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode; A gaming machine characterized by comprising: winning notification means (resurrection effect on an auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increase lottery has been won in the next game round after the game round in which the end screen was displayed.

According to this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery will be won in the next game after the game where the end screen was displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the second game mode to continue, thereby improving game interest. It becomes possible to aim for. In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is made visible to the player in the game round in which the end condition for the second game mode is satisfied, and then the player is notified that the number of games that can be played under the second game mode has increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction of winning the increase lottery.

Game machine O10. In any of the gaming machines O1 to O9, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed at the first game in the normal state. A gaming machine that does.

According to this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, the end screen is displayed during the first game in the normal state. With this configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while enjoying the afterglow of the game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
The gaming states include an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies you of the operation method for achieving a specific winning (bell winning), and a normal state (normal state) in which the instruction function does not operate. section) and,
The advantageous state has a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first gaming mode,
A game characterized in that, when transitioning from the second game mode to the normal state, an end screen is displayed to notify that the advantageous state has ended in the first game of the normal state. Machine.

According to this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed during the first game in the normal state. With this configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while enjoying the afterglow of the game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine P2. The gaming machine P1 is provided with a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) for determining whether to transition from the normal state to the first game mode, and the transition determination means A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the end screen is continuously displayed until a gaming cycle is determined to be shifted to a mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game round in the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P3. The above-mentioned gaming machine P2 is characterized in that it is provided with a number-of-games notification means (a function for displaying the number of consecutive games of the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of games played under the first gaming mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played will not be the same as the number of games played under the first gaming mode, so it is not possible to notify or update the number of games played under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, there is a possibility that players may think that playing under normal conditions is meaningless and reduce their desire to play. . However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each game in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to the notification of the number of games played in the first game mode, which reduces the visual discomfort. It becomes possible to reduce the amount. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine P4. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P3 is provided with a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) for determining whether or not to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode, The determining means is characterized in that the percentage of determining that the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is determined is higher than the percentage of determining that the transition is not to be transitioned from the normal state to the first gaming mode. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of times the game stays in the normal state. As a result, by displaying the end screen during the first game in the normal state, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary performances executed under the normal state, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the gaming machine P2 or gaming machine P3, it is possible to reduce the chances that the end screen will be displayed continuously for a long period of time, and the player will not end the game while the end screen is displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the chances of this happening.

Game machine P5. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P4, the end screen is configured to display the difference in the number of coins from when the number of game media in the advantageous state is reduced to the end until the end of the advantageous state, and the end screen A gaming machine characterized in that the difference number of coins displayed in the game machine is configured such that the game result in the normal state is not reflected.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media decreases to the maximum in an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference number of coins displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game result in the normal state. With this configuration, even if the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to accurately notify the number of gaming media acquired by the player under advantageous conditions. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine P6. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P5, a transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main controller 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode; advantageous information reporting means (suggested jewel and confirmed jewel display function of the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying advantageous information advantageous to the player when the means determines not to shift from the normal state to the first gaming mode; A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this gaming machine, if the normal state does not change to the first gaming mode, advantageous information advantageous to the player is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from shying away from playing games under normal conditions.

Game machine P7. In the gaming machine P6, the advantageous information notifying means is configured to cause all of the plurality of circulation display means to display the symbols in a cycle in a game round in which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first game mode is not to be performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is obtained before all of the plurality of circulation display means stop circulating display of symbols in the game round in which the transition determination means has determined not to make the transition from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the picture, the notification is no longer made. With this configuration, it is possible to allow a player who wants to check advantageous information to play a game under normal conditions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from decreasing due to the normal state.

Game machine P8. The gaming machine P6 or P7 is characterized in that the advantageous information notifying means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, advantageous information is reported based on the number of times the normal state continues. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play when the normal state is not shifted to the first gaming mode. Further, when this configuration is applied to the configuration related to the gaming machine P2, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous under the normal state. If the end screen is continuously displayed over multiple game rounds, there is a concern that the game will become monotonous. This is because it becomes possible to make the player's attention focus on advantageous information.

Game machine P9. Any of the gaming machines P1 to P8 is characterized in that it includes an end screen control means (display control device 81) that performs control to display the end screen in the game round in which the second game mode ends. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round when the second gaming mode ends. With this configuration, it is possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will notice that the normal state is present. .

Gaming machine P10. In the above-mentioned gaming machine P9, an additional lottery means (additional lottery of the main controller 101) that performs an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode. processing function S4403), and a winning notification means (resurrection effect on the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increased lottery was won in the next game round after the game round in which the end screen was displayed. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery will be won in the next game after the game where the end screen was displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the second game mode to continue, thereby improving game interest. It becomes possible to aim for. In addition, in such a configuration, the end screen is made visible to the player in the game round in which the end condition for the second game mode is satisfied, and then the player is notified that the number of games that can be played under the second game mode has increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction of winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration that displays an end screen under normal conditions, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, when a predetermined player ends a game with the end screen displayed, the other players operate the start operation means to start the next game while expecting the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to do so.

Gaming machine P11. In any of the gaming machines P1 to P8, if the first ending condition (difference number of coins is 2400) is satisfied, first ending means (of the main controller 101) ends the advantageous state and shifts to the normal state. Advantageous section end function (S1703 to S1705), if a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is satisfied, the advantageous state is ended. a second ending means for transitioning to the normal state (advantageous section end functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101); and a control means (display control device) for controlling to display an end screen that notifies the end of the advantageous state. 81), and the control means controls to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended. and when the second termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the gaming machine is characterized in that control is performed to display the termination screen in a game round in which the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, there are a first ending condition and a second ending condition as ending conditions for ending an advantageous state, and when the first ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the first ending condition is satisfied. Control is performed to display an end screen in the next game round of the game round, and when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round where the second end condition is met. be exposed. In this way, by varying the game times in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q1. a plurality of cyclic display means (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of symbols;
a start operation means (start lever 41, first to third credit input switches 56 to 58) operated to start the circular display of the symbols;
A lottery means (lottery processing function of the main control device 101) that performs lottery of winning combinations;
a plurality of stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
Based on the fact that the winning symbol corresponding to the winning symbol selected in the lottery for the aforementioned symbol forms a predetermined combination (such as a combination of small symbol symbols) at the valid position (valid line) and stops, the player is notified that the prize has been won. In a gaming machine equipped with a benefit granting means (medal payout processing S213 of the main control device 101, etc.) that grants a benefit,
The gaming states include an advantageous state (advantageous section) in which an instruction function (winning operation notification function) that notifies you of the operation method for achieving a specific winning (bell winning), and a normal state (normal state) in which the instruction function does not operate. section) and,
The advantageous state has a first gaming mode (chance mode) and a second gaming mode (notification mode) in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first gaming mode,
A transition determination means (transition lottery function S1303 of the main control device 101) that determines whether to transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode;
If the transition determining means determines that the normal state should not be transitioned to the first game mode, advantageous information reporting means (suggested jewel and confirmed jewel display function of the auxiliary display section 65) that notifies the player of advantageous information advantageous to the player. A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to this gaming machine, if the normal state does not change to the first gaming mode, advantageous information advantageous to the player is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from shying away from playing games under normal conditions, and it is possible to improve their interest in playing games.

Gaming machine Q2. In the above-mentioned gaming machine Q1, the advantageous information informing means is configured to display a pattern in which all of the plurality of circulation display means rotate the symbols in a game round in which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first game mode is not to be performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is notified before the display is stopped, and the advantageous information is not notified after all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the symbols.

According to this gaming machine, the advantageous information is obtained before all of the plurality of circulation display means stop circulating display of symbols in the game round in which the transition determination means has determined not to make the transition from the normal state to the first game mode. After all of the plurality of circulation display means have stopped the circulation display of the picture, the notification is no longer made. With this configuration, it is possible to allow a player who wants to check advantageous information to play a game under normal conditions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from decreasing due to the normal state.

Gaming machine Q3. The gaming machine Q1 or Q2 is characterized in that the advantageous information notifying means notifies the advantageous information based on the number of times the normal state continues.

According to this gaming machine, advantageous information is reported based on the number of times the normal state continues. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's desire to play when the normal state is not shifted to the first gaming mode.

Gaming machine Q4. In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen is displayed to notify that the advantageous state has ended during the first game in the normal state. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which is displayed.

According to this gaming machine, when transitioning from the second gaming mode to the normal state, an end screen notifying that the advantageous state has ended is displayed during the first game in the normal state. With this configuration, the player can play the first game in the normal state while enjoying the afterglow of the game. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine Q5. The gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that the end screen is continuously displayed until the game round in which the transition determining means determines to transition to the first gaming mode.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen is continuously displayed in each game round in the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of auxiliary effects executed under normal conditions, and it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity. On the other hand, if the end screen is continuously displayed over a plurality of game rounds, there is a concern that the game under the normal state may become monotonous. However, in a configuration in which advantageous information is reported when the normal state continues, it is possible to make the player have expectations that, for example, the next game round will be informed of advantageous information different from this time. It becomes possible to direct the player's attention to advantageous information. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Game machine Q6. The above-mentioned gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a number-of-games notification means (a function for displaying the number of consecutive games of the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying the number of games played in the first game mode in the first game mode. Game machine.

According to this gaming machine, in the first gaming mode, the number of games played under the first gaming mode is notified. In such a configuration, even if a game is played under the normal state, the number of games played will not be the same as the number of games played under the first gaming mode, so it is not possible to notify or update the number of games played under the normal state. If the number of games played is not notified and updated under normal conditions, there is a possibility that players may think that playing under normal conditions is meaningless and reduce their desire to play. . However, if the configuration is such that the end screen is continuously displayed for each game in the normal state, it is possible to switch from the end screen to notification of the number of games played under the first game mode, thereby reducing the visual discomfort. It becomes possible to reduce the amount. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the above concerns.

Gaming machine Q7. In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the end screen is configured to display the difference in the number of game media from the time when the number of game media decreases the most in the advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state, and the end screen A gaming machine characterized in that the difference number of coins displayed in the game machine is configured such that the game result in the normal state is not reflected.

According to this gaming machine, the end screen displays the difference in the number of game media from when the number of game media decreases to the maximum in an advantageous state until the end of the advantageous state. The difference number of coins displayed on this end screen does not reflect the game result in the normal state. With this configuration, even if the end screen is displayed under normal conditions, it is possible to accurately notify the number of gaming media acquired by the player under advantageous conditions. Furthermore, since there is no need for processing to update the difference number of sheets displayed on the end screen, it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity.

Game machine Q8. In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q7, the ratio at which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is determined is higher than the rate at which the transition determination means determines that the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is not performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a configuration in which the ratio is higher than the ratio to be determined.

According to this gaming machine, the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode is higher than the percentage of decisions to make the transition from the normal state to the first gaming mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of times the game stays in the normal state, and it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing games in the normal state. Furthermore, by applying this configuration to the above-mentioned gaming machine Q5, it becomes possible to reduce the chance that the end screen is displayed continuously for a long period of time, and the chance that the player ends the game while the end screen remains is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce the amount.

Game machine Q9. Any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8 described above is characterized in that it includes an end screen control means (display control device 81) that controls displaying the end screen in the game round in which the second game mode ends. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, an end screen may be displayed during the game round when the second gaming mode ends. With this configuration, it is possible to display the end screen across the advantageous state and the normal state, and it is possible to reduce the chance that the player will notice that the normal state is present. .

Gaming machine Q10. In the above-mentioned gaming machine Q9, an additional lottery means (an additional lottery of the main controller 101) that performs an increase lottery (additional lottery) to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode in the second game mode. processing function S4403), and a winning notification means (resurrection effect on the auxiliary display section 65) for notifying that the increased lottery was won in the next game round after the game round in which the end screen was displayed. A gaming machine.

According to this gaming machine, if an increase lottery is held to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played under the second game mode, the increase lottery will be won in the next game after the game where the end screen was displayed. You may be notified of what has happened. With this configuration, when the end screen is displayed, it becomes possible to operate the start operation means to start the next game round while expecting the second game mode to continue, thereby improving game interest. It becomes possible to aim for. Furthermore, in such a configuration, the end screen is made visible to the player in the game round in which the end condition for the second game mode is satisfied, and then the player is notified that the number of games that can be played under the second game mode has increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction of winning the increase lottery. Furthermore, when this configuration is applied to a configuration that displays an end screen under normal conditions, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. For example, when a predetermined player ends the game with the end screen displayed, the other players operate the start operation means to start the next game while expecting the second game mode to continue. This is because it becomes possible to do so.

Gaming machine Q11. In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, if the first ending condition (difference number of coins is 2400) is satisfied, first ending means (of the main controller 101) ends the advantageous state and shifts to the normal state. Advantageous section end function (S1703 to S1705), if a second end condition different from the first end condition (the value of the mode game number counter matches the value of the transition game number counter) is satisfied, the advantageous state is ended. a second ending means for transitioning to the normal state (advantageous section end functions S4505 to S4507 of the main controller 101); and a control means (display control device) for controlling to display an end screen that notifies the end of the advantageous state. 81), and the control means controls to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is ended. and when the second termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the gaming machine is characterized in that control is performed to display the termination screen in a game round in which the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to this gaming machine, there are a first ending condition and a second ending condition as ending conditions for ending an advantageous state, and when the first ending condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the first ending condition is satisfied. Control is performed to display an end screen in the next game round of the game round, and when the second end condition is met and the advantageous state ends, control is performed to display the end screen in the game round where the second end condition is met. be exposed. In this way, by varying the game times in which the end screen is displayed depending on which ending condition is met, it is possible to diversify the auxiliary effects, such as executing an auxiliary effect depending on the ending condition that is met. It becomes possible.

As a result of the above, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Note that the gaming machine group O to the gaming machine Q group may be combined as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved. Further, the gaming machine group O to the gaming machine Q group may be combined with the gaming machine group A to the gaming machine N group as appropriate, and even when combined, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10...Slot machine as a gaming machine, 32...Reel constituting a circulating display means and as a rotating body, 41...Start lever as a start operation means or start operation means, 42-44...Stop switch as a stop operation means, 56...First credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 57...Second credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means, 58...Third credit input switch as start operation means or input operation means , 63...Upper lamp constituting the auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 64...Speaker constituting the auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 65...Auxiliary display section constituting the auxiliary performance section or specific performance execution means, 81 ...Display control device constituting a sub-control board or specific effect execution means, 101... Main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

a plurality of cyclic display means for cyclically displaying a plurality of types of pictures;
a start operation means operated to start the circular display of the patterns;
A lottery means for lottery of roles;
a plurality of stop operation means that are operated to individually stop the circular display of the patterns;
A game comprising a privilege awarding means for awarding a privilege to a player as a winning result based on the fact that a winning symbol corresponding to a winning symbol selected in the lottery of the winning symbol forms a predetermined combination at an effective position and stops. On the machine,
The gaming state includes an advantageous state in which an instruction function that notifies an operation method for achieving a specific winning is activated, and a normal state in which the instruction function is not activated,
The advantageous state has a first gaming mode and a second gaming mode in which the instruction function operates more frequently than the first gaming mode,
a first terminating means for terminating the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state when a first terminating condition is met;
a second terminating means for terminating the advantageous state and transitioning to the normal state when a second terminating condition different from the first terminating condition is satisfied;
and control means for controlling the display of an end screen that notifies the end of the advantageous state,
When the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the control means controls to display the end screen in the next game round of the game round in which the first end condition is satisfied, and If the end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, controlling to display the end screen in the game round in which the second end condition is satisfied ;
The configuration is such that the second termination condition can be satisfied when the termination condition of the second gaming mode is satisfied, and when the first termination condition is satisfied and the advantageous state ends, the normal state is terminated. A gaming machine characterized in that the end screen is displayed in the first game .

Images